JP6572865B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits with different numbers of rounds, and there are some that aim to improve the fun of hitting by making different game values that can be acquired.

Japanese Patent No. 2514417

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, there is a problem that to improve the interest in the game of Yu technique's becomes difficult.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a player in games.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a privilege that grants a predetermined privilege based on a specific area in which a game ball can enter and a game ball entering the specific area. Means, a specific flow path through which the game ball can flow, and a first position at which the game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in the specific flow path is more easily guided to the specific area than passing through the predetermined section; First variable means that can be changed to a second position that makes it easier to pass through the predetermined section than being guided to the specific area, operation means that can be operated by the player, and operation contents for the operation means Based on the fact that the first operation content has been reached, the game ball is fired at a first firing speed at which the game ball can easily reach the specific flow path, and a second different from the first operation content. Based on the operation content, the first firing speed A launching means capable of launching a game ball at a second firing speed different from the first launch speed, and a game ball launched at the second launch speed by the launching means is launched at the first launch speed. The ball entry means provided at a position where it is easier to enter than the game ball and whether or not the game ball has entered the ball entry means while at least a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. and discriminating means for discriminating for the second previous SL first varying means on the basis that the previous entry ball means game ball is determined to have entered the special while the specific conditions are satisfied by the determination means executing a first variable control from the position to the first position Ru are first period variable, while the different second specific condition is satisfied and the specific condition, were fired in the first firing rate It is difficult to enter a game ball and a game ball fired at the second firing speed. A game ball to a specific entry means provided at a position where a game ball launched at a third launch rate different from the first launch rate and the second launch rate can enter. First variable control means capable of executing a second variable control in which the first variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a second period based on the fact that the ball has entered. A third position at which the game ball fired at the second launch speed can enter the entrance means, and a game position at which the game ball becomes difficult to enter the entrance means from the third position. And a second variable control means for changing the second variable means in a predetermined specific variable pattern , wherein the specific condition is at least the third variable means . in the firing rate that contains the conditions that may established when the continued firing game balls.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the launching unit is configured to be able to launch a game ball at a launching speed according to an operation amount of the player with respect to the operation unit. is there.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, a specific area in which a game ball can enter, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the specific area, and the game ball flowing down A possible specific flow path, a first position at which a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in the specific flow path is more easily guided to the specific area than passing through the predetermined section, and the specific area The first variable means that can be changed to the second position that makes it easier to pass through the predetermined section, the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation content for the operation means become the first operation content. Based on this, the game ball was fired at the first firing speed at which the game ball easily reached the specific flow path, and the second operation content was different from the first operation content. Based on a second firing speed different from the first firing speed The launching means capable of launching a game ball with the launching means, and the game ball launched at the second launch speed by the launching means enter the game ball rather than the game ball launched at the first launch speed. The ball entry means provided at a position where it is easy to play, the discrimination means for discriminating whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entry means while at least a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, and the discrimination to said first position from said second position before Symbol first varying means on the basis that the previous entry ball means game ball is determined to have entered the special while the specific conditions are satisfied by means executing a first variable control that will be the first period variable, the while the different second specific condition is satisfied and the specific conditions, the emitted game balls and the second firing in the first firing rate The game ball launched at a speed is in a position where it is difficult to enter and the first launch Based on the game ball entering a specific entry means provided at a position where a game ball launched at a third launch speed different from the second launch speed can be entered, A first variable control means capable of executing a second variable control in which the first variable means is variable for a second period from the second position to the first position; and fired at the second firing speed. A third position at which the game ball can enter the entrance means, and a fourth position at which the game ball cannot enter the entrance means more easily than the third position. 2 variable means and second variable control means for changing the second variable means in a predetermined specific variable pattern , wherein the specific condition is to fire a game ball at least at the third firing speed. that consists of the conditions that may be established in the case was continued.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view of the right variable prize-winning device in a state where the door is closed, and (b) is a front perspective view of the right variable prize-winning device in a state where the door is open. It is a top view of the right variable prize-winning device in the first embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the standby state effect performed in a jackpot standby state. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram of the first per random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed regulation content typically. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table set to ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the main control in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 2nd random number table set to ROM of the apparatus. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, and (b) is a definition of a variation pattern table for jackpot in the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed the content typically, (c) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the deviation (normal) fluctuation | variation pattern table in 1st Embodiment, (d) is 1st implementation. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table in a form. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. . It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the drawing list | wrist in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the change pattern command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a stop classification command process. It is a flowchart which shows the standby state command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the opening command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the round performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the number command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the back image change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing error command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in the display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st hit classification selection table set to ROM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot start process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the standby state command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the case where it is a small hit by lottery of the second special symbol during the probability variation state in the third embodiment, and (b) is a small figure in the third embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in a hit state. (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st random number table set to ROM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM. It is the flowchart which showed the main process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit control processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related command process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the stand-by state effect in the 4th Embodiment while the left action winning opening is in the state which can enter a ball, (b) is 4th implementation. In the form, it is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the stand-by state effect while the right operation winning opening is in the state where the ball can be entered. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot start process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 5th embodiment. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment, (b) is the 1st per category selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (C) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed content of the period length selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the interval setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a top view of the right variable prize-winning apparatus in 6th Embodiment. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode when the right-handed expectation degree suggestion production is set as the production mode during super reach in the sixth embodiment. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode when the right-handed expectation degree suggestion production is set as the production mode during super reach in the sixth embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production | presentation aspect when it becomes a big hit by the lottery of a special symbol and the right-handed expectation degree suggestion production is set in 6th Embodiment, ) Is a diagram schematically showing a change over time in the production mode when a special symbol lottery is missed and a right-handed expectation suggestion production is set in the sixth embodiment. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. is there. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the production | presentation mode selection table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the effect update process 6 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notification start discrimination | determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process 6 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production | presentation aspect selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. In 7th Embodiment, it is the figure which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production | presentation aspect at the time of becoming a left opportunity jackpot. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the opening effect of the left opportunity jackpot in 7th Embodiment, (b) shows an example of the display mode after the opening effect of the left trigger jackpot ends. It is a figure. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process 7 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pseudo | simulation normal state effect process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hit | related process 7 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the standby state command process 7 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, entrance holes 64, 640, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A game ball is played by the game ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 guides the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) for launching a game ball to the front area of the game board 13 and the game ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A firing rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 that stores game balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an upper surface open, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the game ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described later.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach, etc., and play the role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) disposed on the side of the pachinko machine 10, a game ball is operated according to the operation. Is lent out. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit A decorative seal or the like may be added to the 40 installed portions so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. ing. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a game ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed. Inside the operation handle 51, driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted. A touch sensor 51a for performing the operation, a push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the game ball during the pressing operation, and a variable for detecting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. A resistor (not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the game ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and a configuration in which the main control device 110 or another control device detects a game ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a, or a solenoid of the ball launch unit 112a. It may be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clearing is executed.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operation when the game balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A game ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the game balls discharged from the lower dish 50 is placed below the lower dish 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails and windmills, rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the operating winning port 660, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, the working winning port 660, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear, so that the front of the game board 13 has a game A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the ball. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a game opening is provided with a start port or the like and is emitted) Is the area where the water flows down. The game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 or the winning port.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the game balls launched from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. An operation winning opening 660 into which a game ball can enter is provided at the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper left portion in FIG. 2). The operation winning opening 660 shifts to a jackpot state (special game state), which is an advantageous state for the player when a game ball enters. More specifically, when a special symbol (the first symbol) is determined to be a big win, it is set to a state in which the entry into the operating winning opening 660 is valid (a big hit waiting state). In the normal state, even if a game ball enters the operation prize opening 660, there is no influence on the game. In the jackpot waiting state, when the player launches the game ball toward the operation winning opening 660, the game ball enters (wins) the operation winning opening and the jackpot is started. As shown in FIG. 2, a rotating member 670 a that rotates at a constant rotational speed is disposed on the left side of the operation winning opening 660 when viewed from the front. The rotating member 670a can take an arrangement that prevents the game ball launched toward the operation winning opening 660 from moving in the direction of the operation winning opening 660 and an arrangement that does not prevent the rotation. If the game ball is not shot out aiming at the timing at which the moving member 670a is arranged so as not to interfere with the game ball, the game ball cannot be entered (starting a big hit) into the operation winning opening 660. Therefore, when it is determined that the big winning is determined by the lottery of the special symbol, it is possible to fire the game ball in consideration of the arrangement of the rotating member 670a, so that it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the operation winning port 660 is provided at the end of a flow channel (operation winning port flow channel) that is wider than one game ball and narrower than two game balls. This operating winning opening channel receives (inflows) a game ball that has been fired at a predetermined range of firing strength (for example, a firing strength in the range of 95% to 100%) including at least the maximum momentum (launch strength). It is configured as follows. For this reason, when it is determined that the big winning is determined by the special symbol lottery and the big winning standby state is entered, when aiming at the operation winning opening 660, it is easy to simply rotate the handle 51 to the maximum movable range. A game ball can be entered into the operating winning opening 660.

  A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61. A game ball fired at a predetermined launch strength (for example, a launch strength in the range of 90% to 95%) hits the return rubber 69 and is rebounded toward the center while the momentum is attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a game ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special symbol (first design) is drawn, and the game ball is entered normally. When passing through the ball opening 67, a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the case of being made, the jackpot type is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and a specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is won for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or a predetermined number of game balls are won). And the number of rounds is repeated according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large amount of game balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are 6 types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A” to “Big Jack F”. After the special game state is over, the added value after the jackpot is over, according to the results of the jackpot game Value (game value) is given to the player. Note that the three types of “big hits AC” are jackpot types that can be determined when a special symbol lottery is executed when a game ball enters the first entrance 64. The three types of “big jackpots D to F” are jackpots that can be determined when a special symbol lottery is executed when a game ball enters the second entrance 640. It is a type. Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, the special symbol lottery executed when the game ball enters the first entrance 64 is referred to as the first special symbol lottery. The special symbol lottery executed when the player enters the second entrance 640 is referred to as a second special symbol lottery.

  When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol variation display is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a game ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances is different for each type of entrance. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 remains, the next special symbol is drawn. The variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passing of the game ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric ball 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is changed to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), so that the second entrance 640 is changed. Opened. In addition, at the normal time, since the electric accessory 640a is disposed at the closed position, the second entrance 640 is closed. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down from the upper front view toward the second entrance 640 cannot enter the second entrance 640 due to being blocked by the electric accessory 640a. . On the other hand, when the normal symbol is hit, by opening the electric accessory 640a, it becomes easier for the ball flowing down toward the second entrance 640 to enter the second entrance 640, As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily performed.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the game ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of balls held is the first symbol display device 37. And is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  As described above, there are six types of jackpot types for special symbols: “Big Jack A” to “Big Jack F”.

  When it becomes “big hit A”, it becomes a special game state (8 round big hit) with 8 rounds. On the other hand, when “Big Bonus B” or “Big Bonus C” is reached, the number of rounds is a special gaming state of 5 rounds (5 rounds of big jackpot). If it becomes a “big hit E” and “big hit E”, it becomes a special game state (10 round big hit) with 10 rounds. Furthermore, when the jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot D, or jackpot E is reached, after the jackpot ends, the state shifts to a special symbol high probability state (special symbol probable change). In addition, when the high probability state of the special symbol is given, the hit probability of the normal symbol is also increased (the short time state of the normal symbol is given). The high probability state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol continue after the jackpot ends until the next jackpot. On the other hand, when “big hit C” or “big hit F” is reached, the short time state of the normal symbol is given after the jackpot ends, but the high probability state of the special symbol is not given. The short time state of the normal symbol given after the end of the “big hit C” or “big hit F” ends when the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times.

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” means a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called “high probability state of a special symbol” (special symbol probability variation state), in other words, a special gaming state. It is a game state that is easy to shift to (big hit). On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which has a lower probability of jackpot than the probability variation state of a special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (low probability state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol high probability state) means a gaming state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased and a game ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640. . On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol time-short state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state” (ordinary symbol low probability state), which is a normal symbol hit probability normal state, that is, shorter than the short-time state Indicates that the hit probability is low.

  As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the jackpot varies according to the jackpot type. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be the same for all jackpot types (for example, all five rounds). In the present embodiment, the “special symbol probable state” given after the jackpot is continued until the next jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the period during which the “special symbol probability change state” continues may be limited to a time period until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). In this case, the number of lotteries that will be in the “special symbol probable state” may be different from the number of lotteries that will be in the “normal symbol time-short state”. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which varies the number of lotteries according to the type of jackpot.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power, etc., the “special symbol low probability state” and the “normal symbol normal state” are always set. And when it becomes any of “big jackpot A”, “big jackpot B”, “big jackpot D”, “big jackpot E”, it shifts from “low probability state of special symbol” to “probable state of special symbol” , Transition from “normal state of normal symbol” to “short state of normal symbol”. In this case, the set “probability change state of special symbol” and “short-time state of normal symbol” continue until the next big hit. On the other hand, when it becomes “big hit C” or “big hit F”, it shifts to “low probability state of special symbol” and “short time state of normal symbol”. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification, the jackpot ("jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot D", "special symbol probable change state" and "ordinary symbol time-short state" are given after the jackpot ends, "Big jackpot E") is called "probable jackpot". On the other hand, a jackpot (“jackpot C”, “jackpot F”) to which only 100 “normal symbol time-short states” are given after the jackpot ends is referred to as “ordinary jackpot”.

  A lower left portion of the game board 13 as viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2) is provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means. A symbol display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a game entered in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 The number of reserved balls, which is the number of game balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls, is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a game ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry The number of balls is held up to 4 times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are configured to be suspended up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the jackpot type (a special symbol corresponding to the big hit A to F) (First symbol) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a game ball enters (start winning prize) into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a change display of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed on the first symbol display device 37 using that as a trigger. Is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 6, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 7 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 6 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of nine main symbols with numbers “1” to “9”. Each main symbol is configured to imitate numbers “1” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “1” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki and helmets, almost full front of the wooden box. In the lower right side, even numbers are small in green and added to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 8) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a probable jackpot (any one of “Big Jack A”, “Big Jack B”, “Big Jack D”, “Big Jack E”), the odd numbers “1, 3, 5, 7” , 9 "is added to the main symbols. In addition, if it is a normal jackpot ("big hit C" or "big hit F"), a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or longer), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot) It is possible to suppress overlooking. When the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in the present embodiment) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot is determined and a standby state effect indicating the jackpot standby state is displayed. The The details of this standby state effect will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, when the game ball enters the winning winning opening 660 (wins) during the jackpot waiting state, the jackpot is started, and the jackpot video (opening effect) is displayed.

  Further, when the combination of the 3rd symbols displayed in a stopped state is a combination corresponding to detachment and there is a holding ball, a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after the stopping display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest balls in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the special symbol detachment is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there is no reserved ball, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new game ball enters the first entrance 64. When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare for the player to fire a game ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) continuously, but there is no entry to the first entrance 64, and the third symbol stops. In many cases, the displayed state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) because the player has quit the game and the game by the pachinko machine 10 is not performed at all. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, if a new game ball enters the first entrance 64 before a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the change display of the third symbol corresponding to the new entry is displayed. Executed.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is the number of reserved balls that is the number of game balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the game balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, A notice effect is performed by appearing.

  On the other hand, when a game ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (the 1st symbol display device 37), The number of entering balls is reserved up to 4 times for each type of entrance, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. The left half of the small area Ds1 is displayed with the number of reserved balls indicating the number of reserved balls based on the entrance to the first entrance 64, and the right half of the small area Ds2 is It is set as the structure which displays the number of reservation balls number which shows the number of reservation balls based on the entrance to 2 entrance 640. In the example of FIG. 6 (b), four reserved ball numbers symbols are displayed on the left half of the small area Ds1, while no held ball number symbols are displayed on the right half. Although there are four reserved balls of symbols, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is zero.

  In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of held balls is 4 times. It is not limited and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a normal symbol lottery performed as the game ball passes through the normal entrance 67 is being executed by lighting. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the game ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, the symbol “◯” as the normal symbol (second symbol) and the “x” symbol are displayed. Fluctuation display is performed in which the symbols are alternately turned on. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is only for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a game ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. The number of times the game ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol hold lamp 84. The Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as for the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times for the passage of game balls at the normal entrance 67, but 3 times or less, Or you may set to the frequency | count (for example, 8 times) of 5 times or more. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a game ball can enter is disposed. When a game ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by turning on the first entrance switch. The main controller 110 draws the first special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters. The first entrance 64 flows down the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the game ball (left-handed game ball) flowing down the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80. A nail or the like is arranged so that it is easier to enter the game ball than a game ball (a right-handed game ball).

  A second entrance 640 through which a game ball can enter is disposed on the lower right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. When a game ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by turning on the second entrance switch. The main controller 110 draws the second special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. The second entrance 640 is also one of the entrances through which 5 prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters. As shown in FIG. 2, since the second entrance 640 is provided on the right side of the game board 13, basically only the game ball flowing down the flow path provided in the right direction of the variable display device unit 80. Enters the ball.

  A right variable winning device 65 is disposed in the lower left direction of the second entrance 640 when viewed from the front, and a right specific winning opening 65a having a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In addition, a left variable winning device 650 is disposed in the lower left direction of the right variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front. The left variable winning device 650 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the left specific winning opening 650a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. I have. Normally, the opening / closing plate is in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won. In the closed state of the opening / closing plate, the opening / closing plate and the game board 13 are closed so as to be on the same plane, so that the game ball can pass the front side of the opening / closing plate. Further, the open / close plate tilts downward on the front surface, thereby temporarily forming an open state in which the game ball is likely to win the left specific winning opening 650a. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. At the same time, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate that the jackpot is confirmed (the jackpot right has been obtained). Then, in the jackpot waiting state that has been transitioned after the jackpot is confirmed, the gaming state is shifted to a special gaming state in which a larger amount of winning balls are paid out than usual by causing the gaming ball to enter the working winning opening 660. To do. As this special gaming state, the right specific winning port 65a and the left specific winning port 650a that are normally closed are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or a predetermined number of game balls are won). The In other words, the opening / closing door 65f1 that normally closes the right specific winning opening 65a is opened by the first round of the big hit (special game state), and the ball can enter the right specific winning opening 65a. Become. Every time one game ball enters the right specific winning port 65a, ten prize balls are awarded. In addition, in each round after the second round of the jackpot (special game state), the left specific winning opening 650a is opened and the player can enter the ball. Similarly to the right specific winning port 65a, the left specific winning port 650a is awarded 10 winning balls every time one gaming ball enters.

  The right specific winning port 65a, the left specific winning port 650a, and the above-described second ball inlet 640 enter the game ball (the right-handed game ball) flowing down the right channel of the variable display device unit 80. It is placed at a position where a ball is possible (easy to enter). In other words, the game ball that has flowed down the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 is disposed at a position where it cannot enter (difficult to enter). Therefore, in order for a player to receive a payout of a prize ball during a jackpot (to obtain a profit), the game ball may be hit right. Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the right variable prize-winning device 65 is disposed in a slightly inclined state in a downward direction in the lower left direction when viewed from the front. Thus, when the player makes a right strike with the open / close door 65f1 closed, and the game ball reaches the upper surface of the right variable winning device 65, the reached game ball is inclined to the right variable winning device 65. It can be made to flow down to the lower left direction of front view along and can enter into the out port 66. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game ball fired by the right strike from staying in the upper portion of the right variable winning device 65 (the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1). As shown in FIG. 2, the left variable winning device 650 is arranged at the lower left of the right variable winning device 65, and therefore, when the left specific winning port 650 a is opened, the right variable winning device 65. A game ball that has flowed down in the lower left direction as viewed from the front along the slope of the ball enters the left specific winning opening 650a.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, each jackpot round ends (the opened right specific winning port 65a or the left specific winning port 650a is closed again) under the condition of jackpot round (opened). Depending on the type of specific winning award). Specifically, in the first round (the round in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened), 30 seconds have passed after the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, or two or more game balls are in the right specific winning opening. When winning 65a (entering a ball), the door 65f1 is closed and the first round is completed. On the other hand, in each round after the second jackpot (the round in which the left specific winning opening 650a is opened), 30 seconds have passed since the left specific winning opening 650a was opened, or 10 or more games When the ball wins the left specific winning opening 650a, the left specific winning opening 650a is closed and the round is ended.

  In the right variable winning device 65, a sensor for detecting a game ball entering the right specific winning port 65 a is provided in the right variable winning device 65. Therefore, there is a time lag from when a game ball is won (entered) to the right specific winning port 65a until a ball is detected. More specifically, it takes about 0.5 seconds after the game ball enters the right specific winning opening 65a until the number of actually entered balls is counted. In other words, it takes about 0.5 seconds from when the number of game balls for which the condition for ending the round is satisfied enters the right specific winning opening 65a until the open / close door 65f1 is closed. Therefore, if additional game balls can be entered during the 0.5 second period, it is possible to obtain more prize balls than usual (when only the number that satisfies the round end upper limit wins). . In the first embodiment, in one round (the round in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened), the player intentionally enters the right specific winning opening 65a with more than the number of game balls that are conditions for ending the round. It is set as the structure which can be made to make a ball. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of explanation, it is referred to as “over winning” that the number of game balls exceeding the upper limit winning number (the number of winning balls) prescribed in each round wins (enters) the specific winning opening 65a. Called.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5, in the first embodiment, in order to make it easy to generate an overwinning, after the game ball reaches the upper surface of the door 65f1, the door is opened. The upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 is configured so that the period until it passes through the upper surface of the 65f1 becomes longer. By configuring in this way, it becomes easy to add a plurality of game balls and reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 while one game ball flows down the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. Therefore, in the jackpot waiting state, at the timing when more game balls are flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the game balls are put into the operation winning opening 660 to start the jackpot (opening the opening / closing door 65f1). ), All game balls flowing down the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 can be made to enter the opened right specific winning opening 65a. As described above, in the first round of the jackpot, the process ends when two or more winnings (winning balls) are detected for the specific winning opening 65a. However, if the first round of jackpot can be started with three or more game balls reaching the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 before the jackpot starts, the three or more game balls are moved to the right specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to obtain more prize balls than originally (award balls for two prizes). Therefore, depending on the timing at which the game ball enters the operational winning opening 660, it is possible to provide a game that affects the number of winning balls that the player can obtain in the first round of the big win, so that the big hit standby The game during the state can be more enjoyed. In order to allow the game ball to reach the open / close door 65f1 during the jackpot waiting state, the game ball does not enter the operation winning opening 660 (the game ball enters the operation winning opening channel (see FIG. 2)). Can be made to the right with a launching intensity (a launching intensity of less than 95%).

  Next, the structure of the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4A is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 in a state where the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and FIG. 4B is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 in a state where the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened. It is a front perspective view.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c are provided on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 to prevent the game ball from flowing down. Since the game balls flowing down the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 are prevented from flowing down by the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c, the game balls flow down on the open / close door 65f1 along the outer peripheries of the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c. That is, on the open / close door 65f1, a folded flow path is formed by the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c. For this reason, compared with the case where each convex part 65f1a-65f1c is not provided (that is, when a game ball can flow down linearly on the opening / closing door 65f1 from the front view right direction to the left direction), the opening / closing door It is possible to lengthen the period required to flow down the upper surface of 65f1. Thereby, while one game ball is flowing down the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1, a plurality of game balls are easily added to reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. Therefore, in the jackpot waiting state, at the timing when more game balls are flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the game balls are made to enter the operation winning opening 660 to start the jackpot (opening the opening / closing door 65f1). ), It is possible to over-win more game balls.

  FIG. 4B is a diagram showing a state in which the open / close door 65f1 is opened. As shown in FIG. 4 (b), the opening / closing door 65f1 slides from the front side toward the front side when viewed from the front, and enters the inside of the game board 13 through the opening provided in the game board 13. Stored. As a result, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened. When the right specific winning opening 65a is opened, a game ball flowing down from the right direction of the right variable winning apparatus 65 can enter the right specific winning opening 65a. In addition, the height of the opening for storing the opening / closing door 65f1 is sufficiently low with respect to the diameter of the game ball, so that when the sliding movement of the opening / closing door 65f1 starts, the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is flowing down. It is possible to prevent the existing game ball from being stored inside the game board 13 together with the open / close door 65f1. Therefore, when the open / close door 65f1 slides into the game board 13, the game ball on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 can be dropped to the specific winning opening 65a.

  Here, in the first embodiment, the period required for one game ball to pass through the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be about 4 seconds. The game ball firing interval (the interval from launching one game ball to launching the next game ball) is set to 0.6 seconds at the shortest. As a result, when one game ball is flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, about six additional game balls can be launched. Therefore, in the jackpot standby state, about seven game balls are continuously fired toward the variable winning device 65, and then the game balls are made to enter the operation winning port 660, so that about seven games are entered. The first round can be started while the ball is flowing down the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. That is, the open / close door 65f1 is opened, and all the game balls flowing down the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 can be awarded to the specific winning opening 65a. As a result, it is possible to acquire more prize balls than originally (the prize balls for two prizes), so that in the big hit waiting state, the operation winning opening is made with more game balls reaching the open / close door 65f1. A player can be devised to enter a game ball into 660. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the big hit waiting state of the player. Thereby, in the jackpot waiting state, by allowing the game ball to enter the operation winning opening 660 while the game ball is flowing down the opening / closing door 65f1, it is possible to generate a game that can intentionally generate an overwin. Can be provided.

  In the first embodiment, by providing the three convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1, the game balls bypass the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c, and the game balls pass through the open / close door 65f1. Although the passage period is configured to be long, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the provision of the protrusions 65f1a to 65f1c, the material of the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 has a friction coefficient higher than that of other portions (the surface of the game board 13 or the inner surface of the variable winning device 65). You may comprise a big material (for example, elastic body etc.), or give the process which a game ball becomes difficult to roll (for example, provide an unevenness | corrugation on the surface etc.).

  In the first embodiment, 30 seconds have passed since the start of the first round, or when two or more game balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a before 30 seconds have passed, The configuration was to end. In other words, if the player made a right-hand hit, the end condition was set so that the upper limit number (2) of game balls could be made to enter the specific winning opening 65a and the first round would end. It is not limited to this. For example, the first round may be completed in a period of a length that makes it difficult to enter the game ball even if the player hits the right specific winning opening 65a after the first round is started. . Specifically, for example, when 0.5 seconds have passed since the first round started, or when 10 or more game balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a before 0.5 seconds have passed, the first round It is good also as a structure which complete | finishes. In such a configuration, if no game ball is passing through the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation winning opening 660, no single game ball enters the right specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to provide a game that increases the possibility that the first round will end without making a ball. Therefore, the player who wants to win a prize ball in the first round is made to launch the game ball toward the open / close door 65f1 before the game ball is entered into the operation winning opening 660 in the big hit waiting state. It is possible to entertain the gameability of aiming at the operating winning port 660 later. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the big hit waiting state of the player.

  FIG. 5 is a top view of the open / close door 65f1 as viewed from the vertical upper surface side. As shown in FIG. 5, passage detection sensors 228a to 228f that can detect the passage of the game ball are embedded in a zigzag path in which the game ball can roll (easily) on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. . These passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are arranged apart from each other by at least a distance exceeding the diameter of the game ball in the path formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. These passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are known in which the output is H (high) when a game ball is arranged above the output, and the output is L (low) when there is nothing to block the upward. It consists of an optical sensor. In the first embodiment, a combination of outputs from these passage detection sensors 228a to 228f is monitored on the sound lamp control device 113 side. During the big hit standby state, an effect that suggests an indication of the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 can be executed according to the combination of the outputs of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. . That is, an effect that suggests the degree of advantage when a game ball is inserted into the operation winning opening 660 is configured to be executable. As a result, a larger number of game balls are thrown into the operation winning opening 660 at a timing that suggests that more game balls are flowing down the open / close door 65f1 according to the contents of the production. Game balls can be over-winned more easily. Therefore, the player can easily aim for over winning. The details of the standby state effect executed during the jackpot standby state will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 7A and 7B are diagrams showing display modes during a standby state effect executed in the jackpot standby state. As shown in FIG. 7A, when the jackpot standby state is entered, a display area HR1 in which the characters “Big jackpot confirmed!” Is displayed on the upper side of the front view of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is formed. Based on the display contents of the display area HR1, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot has been determined (the jackpot right has been obtained). Also, below the display area HR1, a combination of the third symbols (final stop symbol) that is finally stopped (determined) in the variable display effect that was executed before the big hit standby state is displayed. . By displaying the final stop symbol during the jackpot waiting state, the player can easily confirm at this timing whether the current jackpot is a promising jackpot or a normal jackpot.

  A chance meter CM that is vertically long and divided into six small areas in the vertical direction is displayed on the right side of the final stop symbol in front view. Each area constituting the chance meter CM is configured to be variable between an appearance that turns off and an appearance that emits light. Depending on the number of small areas that appear to emit light, an operation prize is awarded. The configuration suggests the degree of advantage when a game ball enters the mouth 660. More specifically, the number of small areas is in order (priority) from the lower small area according to the number of sensors whose outputs are H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. It is configured to set the appearance (lighting mode) to emit light. That is, in the chance meter CM, game balls corresponding to the number of small areas in the appearance (lighting mode) emitted are passing at least the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 (when the open / close door 65f1 is opened). It is suggested that the player can be awarded to the right specific winning opening 65a). Hereinafter, for simplification of description, in the chance meter CM, the small area of the emitted appearance is referred to as “gauge”, and the number of the apparent appearance of the small area is referred to as “gauge number”. The change in the appearance of light emission is referred to as “gage accumulation”.

  Below the final stop symbol is a meter charge when you aim for “GO!”! ! The display area HR2 in which the characters “”, the characters “Aim at the upper right in time!”, And the image that suggests aiming at the operation winning opening 660 are formed. By aiming at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) with the characters “GO!” Attached to the player according to the display content of the display area HR2, the right side of the display screen on the right side of the front view is displayed. It can be easily understood that the gauge number of the displayed chance meter CM can be increased. As described above, in this chance meter CM, the gauge number is varied in conjunction with the detection contents of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f disposed on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. By launching the game ball with a launch strength (launch speed) that is enough to enter the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the game ball also reaches the variable winning device 65 disposed downstream thereof. Can be made. Therefore, the game balls continuously reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 by continuously firing the game balls in the direction in which the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is arranged. To do. In this state, aiming at the operation winning opening 660 according to the display content of the display area HR2 (that is, with a launch intensity of 95% to 100%), a big hit is started and the open / close door 65f1 is opened. The Thereby, the game ball flowing down the open / close door 65f1 can be won (entered) in the right specific winning opening 65a. As described above, the rotation member 670a that rotates at a constant rotation speed is provided on the left side of the operation winning prize opening 660 when viewed from the front. The rotating member 670a can prevent the game ball from entering the operation winning opening 660 depending on the rotation position. A game ball can be launched at a launch timing that also takes into account the rotational position of the member 670a. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the jackpot waiting state.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a state in which three gauges of the chance meter CM are stored. As shown in FIG. 7B, when the game ball is passing above the three sensors of the passage detection sensors 228c to 228e, the outputs of these three sensors become H (high). The sound lamp control device 113 detects the number of sensors that are in H output and reflects them in the aspect of the chance meter CM. In the example of FIG. 7B, since the outputs of the three sensors (passage detection sensors 228c to 228e) are H, it is displayed in a state where three gauges of the chance meter CM are accumulated. In this way, the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 is detected by the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f, and a guideline of the number of game balls passing through is determined according to the detection result. By making it the structure displayed by, it can make it easier to understand the timing which should aim at the operation | movement prize winning opening 660 with respect to a player. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for a player who has little experience playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 to intuitively understand the timing for aiming at the operation winning opening 660. Thereby, since the player who plays a game for the first time can be made to play a game easily, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, in the big hit waiting state, the guide ball number indicating the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 is indicated by the number of gauges of the chance meter CM. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration that suggests an advantageous degree of jackpot by the number of gauges of the chance meter CM may be adopted. Specifically, for example, the jackpot type may be suggested based on the number of gauges of the chance meter CM, and the player may be instructed of the degree of advantage when the game ball is inserted into the operation winning opening 660. Alternatively, for example, the jackpot round number may be determined to be indefinite when the jackpot is determined, and the jackpot round number may be drawn at the timing when the operation winning opening 660 is passed. Then, by suggesting the number of rounds determined by the lottery executed when the game ball is inserted into the operation winning opening 660 according to the number of gauges, when the game ball is inserted into the operation winning opening 660 It is good also as a structure which suggests an advantageous degree to a player.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. In the corner on the lower right side of the game board 13, an adhering space K <b> 1 for adhering a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided. The stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A game ball that has not won any winning opening is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a game ball with a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). I have. The game balls supplied from the island facilities in the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of game balls are paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 12) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 12, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol A stop type counter C3 used for selecting a stop type, a change type counter CS1 used for selecting a change pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. And are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 30). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a including four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). Each of these areas has an entrance to the first entrance 64. The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the ball timing. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b including four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a second entrance 640. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the ball entry timing. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with an execution area 203c for storing values of a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, and a stop-type selection counter C3 that are subject to lottery execution. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a game ball is stored. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 30).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when a game ball enters the first entrance 64, the value Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203 a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

  As described above, the value of the random number that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the first random number counter When the value of C1 matches the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the first random number table, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a high probability of being a big hit than the low probability (special The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently (see FIG. 9B). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. For example, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is periodically updated (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption process), and when a game ball enters the first entrance 64, The value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (execution area 203c when the special symbol lottery is not being executed). On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b (execution area 203c when the special symbol lottery is not being executed) in the RAM 203. Stored.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 203c is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the screen is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 203c is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is: It will be the one at the time of jackpot of special design. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. It becomes a display mode.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In the first per random number counter C1, there are two random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “0, 1” is the first per random number for the low probability. It is stored in a table (see 202a1 in FIG. 9B). Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 2 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol jackpot is “1/200”. The random value (counter value) that is a big hit is common to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 20 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 19” are stored in the first per-random number table for the high probability ( (See 202a2 in FIG. 9B). In this way, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 20 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is a jackpot is “1/20”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, as shown in FIG. 10 (a), when the first special symbol lottery is won and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 4”, the big hit type is “big hit A” ( 8 rounds probable big hit). Also, the jackpot type when the value is “5-64” is “Big Jack B” (5-round probability variable jackpot), and the jackpot type when the value is “65-99” is “Big Jack C”. (5 rounds are usually big hits).

  On the other hand, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 4” in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big hit type is “big hit D” (16 rounds probable big hit). The jackpot type when the value is “5 to 64” is “big jackpot E” (10 round probability variable jackpot), and the jackpot type when the value is “65 to 99” is “jackpot F”. (10 rounds are usually big hits).

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that six types of hits (big hits A to F) are determined based on the type of special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Has been.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process). When a game ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (if the special symbol lottery is not being executed, it is stored in the execution area 203c). When a game ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b (execution area 203c when the special symbol lottery is not being executed) in the RAM 203. The

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. Also, in the low probability state, a low probability that the range of random values corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 is narrow in order to secure the time for entering the game ball into the first entrance 64. A time table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select.

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the game ball to the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 30) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11A) that stores a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided.

  Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 11A, the variation pattern table 202d is a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 11B) as a table for selecting a variation pattern based on the lottery of the first special symbol. The deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 11C) and the deviation (probability) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 11D) are defined at least.

  First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As a variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined. In the big hit variation pattern table 202d1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Specifically, as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1, a range of “0 to 50” is associated with variation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), and a range of “51 to 179” is associated with various types of super reach. Fluctuation patterns of (60 seconds) are associated, and various special reach (90 seconds) variation patterns are associated with the range of “180 to 198”. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 that has been acquired is set. It is selected from the big hit variation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery result is out of place in the low probability state of the special symbol. . If the special symbol lottery result is out of place, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if in the range of “80 to 99”, outlier reach is set. Set (reach out of front / rear, reach out of front / rear).

  Here, when the variation pattern type is complete deviation, either a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time or a long deviation (10 seconds) with a relatively long variation time is set. “0 to 98” is set as the judgment value for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the judgment value for the fluctuation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  Also, for outreach, various types of outreach normal reach (30 seconds) are in the range of the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 “0 to 149” (30 seconds), and out of superreach are in the range of “150 to 197”. (60 seconds), “198” is set with various special reach (90 seconds).

  In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the special symbol lottery result is out of the normal gaming state, and the fluctuation obtained from the out (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 11D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3. The deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is lost in the special symbol probability variation state. In the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the set value of the variation type counter CS1 is different from the above-described variation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” based on the stop type selection table (not shown), complete losing is determined. If within the range of “90 to 99”, the detachment reach (rear-rear reach, reach other than front-rear reach) is determined.

  In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the player is out of play is set lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deviation fluctuation time from becoming longer at the time of probability change and the period until the big hit from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the game is prolonged when the probability-changing game state in which a big hit is easily made, and the player feels bored.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the through gate 67. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203d.

  The value of the random number that is a normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 10B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. Is determined to be a normal symbol hit when it matches the value of the winning random number set by the second random number table. In addition, this second random number table is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a high probability (a normal symbol of a normal symbol) that has a higher probability of being a normal symbol than the low probability. The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently (see FIG. 10B). In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (b), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the value is "5-28". In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 while the total number of random number values is 240, so the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device In 83, the normal symbol variation display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the obtained value of the second random number counter C4 is within the range of “5-28”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second As a symbol), a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is released only once for "0.2 seconds x 1" when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, when the game ball passes the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device In 83, the normal symbol variation display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In this case, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 640a is opened “twice × 1 second”. Is done. In this way, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is further reduced. Since “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times” is very long, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second entrance 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 64a is released only “one second × two times” when the normal symbol is hit. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 30).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 12, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 30), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 29) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Next, the specific contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the present embodiment. The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores at least a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, a second per-random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d as a part of the fixed value data described above. ing.

  The first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the first per random number counter C1 and the lottery result is defined. Specifically, “0, 1” is defined as the range of determination values determined to be big hits in the low probability state of the special symbol (see 202a1 in FIG. 9B), and the high probability state (probability variation of the special symbol) In the state), “0 to 19” is defined as a range of determination values determined to be big hits (see 202a2 in FIG. 9B). When the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning matches with one of the determination values corresponding to the jackpot defined in the first per-random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B) It is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 10A) is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored for each special symbol type, and the determination of the first hit type counter C2 is performed. A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, for the first special symbol, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “0 to 4” is defined in association with “big hit A”. (See 202b1 in FIG. 10A). This “big jackpot A” is a big jackpot that has 8 rounds and is given a “special symbol probable state” that continues until the next big jackpot after the jackpot ends, and a “short time state of normal symbols” . Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are five counter values that are “big hit A”, so “big hit A” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 5% (5/100). This “jackpot A” has the largest number of rounds among the jackpots of the first special symbol, and “special symbol probable state” and “ordinary symbol time-short state” which are advantageous after the jackpot end are given. This is the most advantageous jackpot type among the jackpots of the first special symbol.

  With respect to the first special symbol, a range of “5-64” of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit B” (see 202b2 in FIG. 10A). . This “jackpot B” is a jackpot that has 5 rounds and is given a “special symbol probable state” that continues until the next jackpot after the jackpot ends, and a “short-time state of normal symbols” . Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 60 counter values that become “big hit B”, so “big hit B” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 60% (60/100). Although the number of rounds is small, this “jackpot B” is given an advantageous “special change state of special symbol” and “short time state of normal symbol” after the jackpot, as in the case of “jackpot A”. Is a type of jackpot that is relatively advantageous to the user.

  With respect to the first special symbol, a range of “65 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit C” (see 202b3 in FIG. 10A). . The “big jackpot C” is a big jackpot that has five rounds and is given a “normal symbol short-time state” that continues until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the big jackpot ends. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 35 counter values that become “big hit C”, so “big hit C” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The proportion is 35% (35/100). This “jackpot C” is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous for the player because the number of rounds is small and the game state after the jackpot is also disadvantageous compared to “jackpot A” and “jackpot B”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10 (a), for the second special symbol, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from “0 to 4” is defined in association with “big hit D”. (See 202b4 in FIG. 10A). This “jackpot D” is a jackpot that has 16 rounds and is given a “special symbol probable state” that continues until the next jackpot after the jackpot ends, and a “short-time state of normal symbols”. . Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are five counter values that are “big hit D”, so “big hit D” is determined when the big special is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. The ratio is 5% (5/100). The “big hit D” is the jackpot type that is most advantageous for the player because the number of rounds is the largest and the gaming state after the big hit is advantageous.

  For the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit E” in the range of “5-64” (see 202b5 in FIG. 10A). . This “big jackpot E” is a big jackpot that has 10 rounds and is given a “special symbol probable state” that continues until the next jackpot after the jackpot ends, and a “short time state of normal symbols” . Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 60 counter values that become “big hit E”, so “big hit E” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 60% (60/100). Although this “big hit E” has fewer rounds than the “big hit D”, the gaming state after the big hit is as advantageous as the “big hit A”, “big hit B”, and “big hit D” Is set, it is a kind of jackpot type that is advantageous for the player.

  For the second special symbol, a range of “65 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit F” (see 202b6 in FIG. 10A). . The “big jackpot F” is a big jackpot with 10 rounds, and after the jackpot, a “normal symbol time-short state” that continues until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 35 counter values that are “big hit F”, so “big hit F” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The proportion is 35% (35/100). This “bonanza F” is more disadvantageous for the player because the number of rounds is larger than the jackpot of the first special symbol (“jackpot A” to “bonanza C”), but the gaming state after the jackpot ends is disadvantageous. It is a big jackpot type.

  In this way, if a lottery is won in the second special symbol lottery, it becomes a jackpot type with more rounds than the first special symbol lottery, so the lottery of the second special symbol is more than the lottery of the first special symbol. Is advantageous to the player. Note that the ratio between the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot is the same for both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery (the probability variation jackpot is 65% and the normal jackpot is 35%).

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 10B) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are defined (stored). Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, “5 to 28” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 10B). Further, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 10B). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired based on the game ball passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the second per-random number table 202c are referred to. However, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol.

  The variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11) is a data table in which the determination values of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation pattern display mode are defined for each display mode. Note that details of the variation pattern table 202d are as described above in the description of the variation type counter CS1, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 13, the RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, an execution area 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d, and a first special symbol reserved ball number counter. 203e, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g, probability variation flag 203h, hour and middle counter 203i, incoming ball waiting flag 203j, big hit start flag 203k, big hit middle flag 203m, and other memory area 203z Have at least.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, a first per-random number counter C1 and a first per-type Each value of the counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the game ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding). Among the vacant areas of the first area to the reserved fourth area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the case where the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are stored in the execution area 203c. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) to (see FIG. 12) and stored in the execution area, special symbols such as lottery are determined.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area 203c, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  Similar to the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b has four reservation areas. Each counter value acquired based on the start winning to the 2nd entrance 640 is memorized in this 2nd special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The execution area 203c is a storage area in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 for using the special symbol lottery for execution are stored. The values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area 203c are compared with the first per-random number table 202a, the first per-type selection table 202b, and the like, and a special symbol lottery is executed.

  The normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203d has one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored. More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the holding first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, which is the same as in the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. In addition, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other reserved areas are packed into the reserved area having the area number one smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and every time a game ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value 1 is added to 4 (see S404 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 22).

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 22, FIG. 24). (See S405). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is changed.

  The sound lamp control device 113 displays the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is held in the actual variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even when the number of balls has deviated from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of held balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f displays a variation display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the second entrance 640 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and every time a game ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is increased. 1 is incremented up to 4 (see S410 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time a new special symbol variation display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 22). Similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is also notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is the number of reserved balls for the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passing of the game ball at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 ( This is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time a game ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of held balls in variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 every time a variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 26).

  When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d (S705 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d (S703 in FIG. 27: No).

  The probability variation flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state. If the probability variation flag 203h is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol certain variation state. If the flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol low probability state. In addition, as described above, the normal symbol is in a short time state during the probability change state of the special symbol. Therefore, if the probability variation flag 203h is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in a certain variation state and that the normal symbol is in a short time state.

  The initial value of the probability change flag 203h is set to OFF, and when the probability change jackpot (any one of “Big Jack A”, “Big Jack B”, “Big Jack D”, “Big Jack E”) It is set to ON at the end (see S1215 in FIG. 32). In addition, the probability variation flag 203h is reset to OFF when the big hit game is started (see S219 in FIG. 22).

  This probability variation flag 203h is referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state in the special symbol variation start process (see S302 in FIG. 23). Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S213), the probability variation flag 203h is referred to. A special symbol drawing will be held. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203h is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first per-random number table 202a for low probability (see 202a1 in FIG. 9B).

  The probability variation flag 203h is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is a short time state in the normal symbol variation process (S608, S614, S620 in FIG. 26). Specifically, the probability variation flag 203h and the hour / minute counter 203i described later are referred to in the normal symbol variation process, and if the probability variation flag 203h is on or the value of the hour / minute counter 203i is 1 or more, Based on the second per random number table 202c for high probability (see 202c2 in FIG. 10B), it is determined that the normal symbol is in the short time state, and the normal symbol is drawn (see S609 in FIG. 26). . On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203h is off and the value of the hour / minute counter 203i is 0, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state, and the second per random number table 202c for the low probability time (FIG. 10 ( A normal symbol lottery is performed based on b) (202c1) (see S610 in FIG. 26). In the normal symbol variation process, the probability variation flag 203h is also referred to when determining the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit (S614 in FIG. 26). (See S620).

  The hour / minute counter 203i is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203i is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the ordinary symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203i is 0 and the probability variation flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the short / medium counter 203i is set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, and the value is set to 100 at the end of the normal jackpot every time it is a big jackpot. (See S1214 in FIG. 32). In addition, regardless of the type of jackpot, if the jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery, the value is set to 0 while setting the start of the jackpot (see S219 in FIG. 22).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour / minute counter 203i and the state of the probability change flag 203h are referred to, and the value of the hour / hour counter 203i is 1 or more or the probability change flag 203h is on. For example, it is determined that the normal symbol is short. In this case, a normal symbol lottery is performed based on the second per-random number table for high probability (see S609 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, if the value of the hour / middle counter 203i is 0 and the probability variation flag 203h is off, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state, and the normal symbol is determined based on the second per random number table for low probability. The lottery is performed (see S610 in FIG. 26).

  The winning ball waiting flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not a big hit waiting state is reached in which the start of a big hit is awaited until a game ball enters the operating winning opening 660. If the incoming ball waiting flag 203j is on, it means that it is a jackpot standby state, and if it is off, it means that it is not a jackpot standby state. The entrance waiting flag 203j is set to ON when a special symbol lottery is won and a change time of a change pattern corresponding to the jackpot elapses (see S220 in FIG. 22). In addition, the ball waiting flag 203j is set to OFF when a game ball has entered the operation winning opening 660 during the jackpot waiting state (see S1104 in FIG. 31). While the ball waiting flag 203j is on, the ball entering the operation winning opening 660 is treated as valid (a big hit is started when a ball is detected).

The jackpot start flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not to start a jackpot.
If the jackpot start flag 203k is on, it means that the timing for starting the jackpot is reached (the game ball has entered the operation winning opening 660 and the jackpot waiting state has ended). This means that it is not time to start. The jackpot start flag 203k is set to ON when a game ball enters the operating winning opening 660 during the jackpot waiting state (see S1103 in FIG. 31). The jackpot start flag 203k is set to off when the jackpot start is set (see S1203 in FIG. 32).

  The jackpot flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If the jackpot flag 203m is on, it means that it is a jackpot, and if it is off, it means that it is not a jackpot. The jackpot flag 203m is a jackpot by drawing a special symbol, and is set to ON when the jackpot (special game state) is started (see S1203 in FIG. 32). Also, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1217 in FIG. 32). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22), the jackpot flag 203m is referenced to determine whether or not the jackpot is being hit (see S201 in FIG. 22).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  As described above, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is provided with various counters and flags.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes an opening / closing door that closes or opens the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the right specific winning port 65a, and the left specific winning port 650a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for driving 65f1 to open and close, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the like, and a rotating body motor 670c for rotating the rotating member 670a are connected. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is connected to the input / output port 205. Various processes are executed based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the game ball is set according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when an instruction to launch a game ball is given by the main control device 110. is there. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the game ball is off (not operated). The launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and a game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable display effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, passage detection sensors 228a to 228f, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the outputs of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f, and determines the approximate number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 from the number of sensors whose output is H (high). It is configured to be able to grasp. In the jackpot standby state, the mode (the amount of gauge) of the chance meter CM displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is varied in accordance with the number of game balls grasped according to the number of sensors. Thereby, the player sees the amount of winning balls (the number of gaming balls entering when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened) obtained when the gaming balls are inserted into the operation winning opening 660. Can make it easy to understand. Therefore, during the jackpot waiting state, the player makes a right strike at a firing strength that does not reach the operation winning opening 660 more positively (a launch strength of less than 95%), and causes more game balls to reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. It can be made to try. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the jackpot waiting state.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents at the time, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

  Based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is a more detailed fluctuation from the rough fluctuation contents (fluctuation time, fluctuation type (reach, miss, etc.)) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. Used to determine content. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough variation content instructed from the main control device 110, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a variation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and a variation time counter 223f. A standby state effect flag 223g, a level counter 223h, a game state storage area 223i, and other memory area 223z.

  The winning information storage area 223a has storage areas composed of four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, it has one execution area. Each area stores winning information. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start winning is detected in the main controller 110, each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning Based on the value, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the various information thus predicted Is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol held in the main controller 110 up to four times. The symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol up to four times.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reservation ball number stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value of the counter 203f cannot be acquired. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter. At 223c, the number of reserved balls is managed for each special symbol type.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of reserved balls for variable display is added by entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, or in the main controller 110, a special symbol When the variable display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is stored. The ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 or the second special symbol is received from the reserved ball number command. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4308 in FIG. 36). In this way, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. Therefore, the values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110.

  The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. In addition, in order to notify the display controller 114 of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage, a display reserved ball number command is sent to the display controller 114. Send to.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, and the second special hold ball number counter 223b. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223 of the main controller 110. The value is changed in synchronization with 203f. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110. It is possible to change while synchronizing with. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4302 in FIG. 36), and is turned off when setting of variation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S4502 in FIG. 38). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4305 in FIG. 36), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S4507 in FIG. 38). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

  The fluctuation time counter 223f is a counter that counts the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation display. When a variation pattern command is received from main controller 110, a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command is set in variation time counter 223f.

  The standby state effect flag 223g is a flag indicating whether or not the standby state effect (see FIGS. 7A and 7B) is being executed. If this standby state effect flag 223g is on, it means that the standby state effect is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the standby state effect is not being executed. The standby state effect flag 223g is set to ON when the standby state command indicating that the jackpot standby state has been entered is received from the main control device 110 and the start of the standby state effect is set (FIG. 37). S4403). The standby state effect flag 223g is set to OFF when an opening command indicating the start of a big hit is received from the main controller 110 (see S4406 in FIG. 37).

  The level counter 223h is a counter indicating the gauge number (level) of the chance meter CM displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the standby state effect (see FIGS. 7A and 7B). The value of the level counter 223h is updated in conjunction with the number of sensors whose outputs are H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f (see S4204 in FIG. 35). That is, the number of sensors whose output is H (high) is set as the counter value.

  The game state storage area 223 i is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. This game state storage area 223i is updated every time a state command is output from the main controller 110 every time a change occurs in the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (see S4310 in FIG. 36). Note that the gaming state storage area 223i is configured by a 1-byte storage area, for example, and is configured so that the gaming state can be specified by the state of the lower 2 bits. More specifically, for example, the least significant bit indicates whether or not the normal symbol is in the short state, and the least significant bit indicates whether or not the special symbol is in a probable state. Therefore, in the “special symbol low probability state” and the “normal symbol normal state”, the lower 2 bits are “00B”, and in the “special symbol low probability state” and the “normal symbol short-time state”, the lower bit The two bits are “01B”, and the lower two bits are “11B” in the “special symbol probability changing state” and the “normal symbol time-short state”. The MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 on the sound lamp control device 113 side based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223i.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the RAM 223 has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed, an elapsed time timer for measuring the production time, and the like. doing. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots and the number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and also reads and writes data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code at the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is a control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Accordingly, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 39) executed after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 39) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 20) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 41B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed. It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and it is possible to omit the time required for the reading. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image for displaying a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 39).

  Here, referring to FIG. 16, the power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 16 shows that the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to use the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 performs the process shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 16, a power-on variation image of a “◯” symbol is displayed on the display screen of the power-on main image on the lower right side of the screen, and “◯” as shown in FIG. A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and when it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 16B is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and when it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, the player started playing while the main image was displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the power was turned on, and the entrance was detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. In this case, a power-on variation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 16B and 16C are alternately displayed. The image controller 237 is instructed by the MPU 231 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. If an incoming ball is detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the hour main image is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed on the 3rd symbol display. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 15, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 17, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images and the back images will be described. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of back images and the range of back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 17B shows the rear surface A corresponding to the “sand beach stage” and the rear surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the back images corresponding to the respective back surfaces A and B are prepared in the character ROM 234 as images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the change of the rear surface type is determined and the stage is changed to “sand beach stage” or “deep sea stage”, the MPU 231 sets the position between the first position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding rear image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 17 (a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy stage as the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are all rear surfaces of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage “sand beach stage” is displayed, so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the “sand beach stage” displayed frequently is displayed. By making them all reside in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Thus, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17 (b), the rear surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage” has only a part of the rear surface, that is, image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is made resident in the resident video RAM 235. However, if so, the resident video RAM 235 is used. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a ′ (or the range from FIG. 17A to FIG. 17B). ) And image data corresponding to an image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or an image between FIGS. 17A and 17B) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the back of the resident video RAM 235 is determined when the stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from the left to the right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the back B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 15) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 15, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine types of main symbols (see FIG. 6B) with the numbers “1” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. The As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Accordingly, the third symbol display device has been started in spite of the fact that the first symbol display device 37 has started to change after the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has entered. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuating effect is not started immediately.

  In the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the main symbols not numbered "1" to "9" is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “youth” and “female” are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e. Thus, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character in the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot AF. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot type is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special game state from now on, and the right specific winning port 65a and the left specific winning port 650a that are normally closed are repeatedly opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and according to the type of the sprite, the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the translucency Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. The back surface type is either a back surface A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either “sand beach stage” or “deep sea stage”), or a back surface different from the back surface A or B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is displayed.

  The MPU 231 specifies, as a drawing target, a rear image corresponding to the stage determined by the lottery among the rear surfaces A and B when the rear surface type specifies that either of the rear surfaces A and B is displayed. Further, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is defined as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 18). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The content of the image to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 20) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 19 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 19).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 19, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 20) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 19, when the pointer 233 f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S6005 in FIG. 39). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7705 in FIG. 51B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 41B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 41B) and a simple display setting process (FIG. 41 (b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 42 to 47) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 48 to 50) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7601 in FIG. 51A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 51B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction for is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 41B). ) (See S6303)), pointer update processing (see S7305 in FIG. 48) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (Refer to FIG. 20), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image of one frame. As shown in FIG. Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,... For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 41B). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7307 in FIG. 48). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7813 in FIG. 52). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7814 in FIG. 52). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7902 in FIG. 53).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the process drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 41B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When 399, 99, 99, 239) are reached, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the game ball in the through gate 67 is executed. Execute (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a game ball when the launch of the game ball is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether the present time is in a jackpot waiting state or a special symbol jackpot (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the entrance waiting flag 203j and the big hit flag 203m is on. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in a standby state or if the special symbol is being jackpoted (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S201, when it is determined that neither the big hit waiting state nor the special symbol big hit is found (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202). If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number N2 of the variable display holding based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is set. Obtain (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set (S206). The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. It is stored in 223c.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. The data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S213.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (first value) Fluctuation display hold count N1) based on special symbol lottery is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired first special symbol hold ball counter 203e is greater than 0 (S209). .

  In the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S209: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S209: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number The value (N1) of the counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S211). The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. It is stored in 223b.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S207 (S212), and the process goes to S213. Transition. In the process of S213 executed after the process of S207 or S212, the special symbol fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213), and this process is terminated. Details of the special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), the variable time counter for measuring the variable time is updated (S214), and the updated variable time counter is updated. Based on the value, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S215). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. Is not passed (S215: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the change time of the change display being executed has passed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. One of the jackpots A to F is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached. When the green LED is turned on and the jackpot D is reached, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. When the jackpot E is reached, the red LED and the green LED are turned on and the jackpot F is obtained. In this case, the blue LED, the red LED, and the green LED are turned on. Further, when it is off, the blue LED and the red LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S217 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows. It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S218). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the probability variation flag 203h is set to OFF and the value of the hour / minute counter 203i is reset to 0 (S219). Then, the ball waiting flag 203j is set to ON, and a standby state command indicating the start of the big hit standby state is set (S220), and the process proceeds to S223. The standby state command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the standby state command, the voice lamp control device 113 displays a display standby state command for starting a standby state effect (see FIGS. 7A and 7B) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is set as a command to be output to the display control device 114. As a result, the standby state effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S218, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S218: No), whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203i is greater than 0 (that is, whether the normal symbol is in the shorter time state) ) Is determined (S221), and when it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203i is greater than 0 (S221: Yes), the value of the hour / hour counter 203i is decremented by 1 (S222), and the process proceeds to S223. To do. On the other hand, in the process of S221, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203i is 0 (S221: No), the process of S222 is skipped and the process proceeds to S223. Although not shown in the figure, if the value of the short time counter 203i after subtraction becomes 0 in the process of S222, the gaming state has been changed from the normal symbol short time state to the normal symbol normal state. A status command indicating is set. The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201, the voice command It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 acquires the gaming state included in the state command. Thereby, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the process of S223, a stop command indicating the stop type is set, and this process ends. The stop command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the later-described main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, the voice command It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the stop symbol of the third symbol based on the stop type indicated by the stop command.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol fluctuation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and includes the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variation effect performed on the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area 203c are acquired (S301).

  Next, the probability variation flag 203h is read, and it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a certain symbol probability variation state (S302). In the processing of S302, if the probability variation flag 203h is on, it is determined that the probability of the special symbol is changed, and if the probability variation flag 203h is off, it is determined that the special symbol has a low probability state (not the probability variation state). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state (S302: Yes), the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol for high probability Based on the jackpot random number table, a lottery result indicating whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is compared with a first per-random number table for high probability (see 202a2 in FIG. 9B). As described above, 20 random numbers of “0 to 19” are set as special symbol jackpots, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value that hits them. When it does, it determines with it being a jackpot of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol probability variation state (the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S302: No), the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301. And a lottery result as to whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of the first random number table for low probability (see 202a1 in FIG. 9B) (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with a special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the winning random number value (that is, “0, 1”), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305). Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode for the big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 10A) to determine what the jackpot type is. To do. As mentioned above, if the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 4”, the big hit A (8 rounds probable big hit) If it is determined that it is in the range of “5-64”, it is determined that the jackpot is B (5-round probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of “65 to 99”, it is a jackpot C (5-round normal jackpot). Determination is made (see FIG. 10A). On the other hand, if the second special symbol is a lottery, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 4”, it is determined that the jackpot D (16 rounds probable big hit), If it is in the range of “5-64”, it is determined that it is jackpot E (10 round normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of “65-99”, it is determined that it is jackpot F (10 round normal jackpot) ( FIG. 10 (a)).

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hits A to F). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A to F) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11A), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 ( (Variation time).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S305 that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third symbol display is performed based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area 203c. As a stop type to be displayed on the device 81, it is set whether it is front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete disengagement.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete outage is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear reach is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. Time).

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the current fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time counter (S311). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S312). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 30). When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22).

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 21), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first and second entrances 64 and 640. This is a process for executing a hold process of values indicated by various counters when there is a start winning.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the game ball has won (start winning) at the first entrance 64 (S401). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the game ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired. (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, even if the game ball has not won the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if the game ball has won the first entrance 64, the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e. If the value (N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. It is stored in 223b.

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (start prize) at the second entrance 640 (S407). Also in this process, similarly to the process of S401, the entrance to the second entrance 640 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the game ball has won the second entrance 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203f (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired. (S408), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S409).

  If there is no winning at the second entrance 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a winning at the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203f is If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the second entrance 640 (S407: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203f (S410). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f changed by the calculation is set (S411).

  The held ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. It is stored in 223c.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S411, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are It stores in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S412), and the process proceeds to S413. In the process of S412, as in the process of S406, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the process of S413, a prefetch process for prefetching the success / failure from various counter values acquired based on the start winning is executed (S413), and this process is terminated. Details of the prefetching process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the prefetch process (S413). In this pre-reading process (S413), first, it is determined whether or not a new entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 has been detected in the current start winning process (see FIG. 24). (S501) If a new incoming ball is not detected (S501: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S501 that a new ball has been detected (S501: Yes), then the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected ball is the upper limit (ie, 4). (S502: Yes), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S502, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S502: No), whether or not the timing for starting the variable display based on the incoming ball is in the special symbol probable state. Is determined (S503). In the process of S503, it is determined whether or not the current game state is in a probable change state according to the current game state and the result of pre-reading the reserved ball held before the current entry. Specifically, if the jackpot is not included in the holding ball, the current gaming state coincides with the timing at which the fluctuation display based on the currently detected ball starts, so that the current gaming state is a probable state. It is determined that In addition, when the jackpot is included in the holding ball, the gaming state may be changed according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, when the probable jackpot is on hold, the system shifts to a probable change state after the jackpot, and when the normal jackpot is held, the system shifts to a normal state after the jackpot. Taking these into account, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the fluctuation display based on the currently detected incoming ball is in a state of probability variation.

  In the processing of S503, when it is determined that the start of the variation based on the detected entry this time is the special symbol probability variation state (S503: Yes), the type of the entrance that detected the entry and the high probability Based on the first random number table (see 202a2 in FIG. 9B), the lottery result based on the current entry is acquired (S504), and the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start time is in the low probability state of the special symbol (S503: No), the type of the entrance that detected the entrance and the first random number table for the low probability time (FIG. 9). Based on (b) 202a1), the lottery result based on the current entry is acquired (S505), and the process proceeds to S506.

  In the process of S506 executed after the process of S504 or S505, a winning information command is set based on the type of the entrance that detected the current entry and the lottery result obtained in the process of S504 or S505. (S506) This process is terminated. The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the type of the entrance and the lottery result notified by the winning information command in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 21), and the normal symbol (second symbol) variation display or the second entrance opening performed in the second symbol display device 83. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to 640.

  In this normal symbol variation process (S106), it is first determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by the normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in a short time state (S608). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, if the probability variation flag 203h is on, or if the value of the hour / minute counter 203i is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the shorter time state. If the probability variation flag 203h is off and the value of the hour / minute counter 203i is 0, it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol is present.

  In the process of S608, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the short-time state (S608: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607, the random number table for the normal symbol for the high probability, Based on the result, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S609). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 10B).

  In the process of S608, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the short time state (S608: No), the process proceeds to S610. In the process of S610, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 is low. Based on the random number table for normal symbols for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of 0 to 4, 29 to 239, it is normal. It is determined that the symbol is out of place (see 202c1 in FIG. 10B).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S609 or S610 is a normal symbol win (S611), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S611: Yes), The display mode for winning is set (S612). In the processing of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “O” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S614. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S611 that the symbol is not a normal symbol (ordinary symbol is off) (S611: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S613). In the processing of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S614. .

  In the processing of S614 executed after the processing of S612 or S613, it is determined whether the normal symbol is in the time-short state (whether the probability variation flag 203h is on or the time-shortage counter 203i is 1 or more) (S614). If the symbol is in the short time state (S614: Yes), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S615), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the short-time state (that is, the probability variation flag 203h is off and the value of the short-and-hours counter 203i is 0) (S614: No), the second symbol display device 83 The variation time of the variation display is set to 30 seconds (S616), and this process is terminated.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is discriminated (S617). The variation time here is a time preset by the processing of S615 or the processing of S616 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the process of S617, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S617: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S617 (S617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S618). In the process of S618, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S618, when the second symbol display update process (see S1008) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The display is stopped and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the processing of S612 or S613.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S619). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S619: Yes), then whether the normal symbol is in a short time state (that is, whether the probability variation flag 203h is on or the short time flag 203i is 1 or more)? (S620), if it is not in the time-short state (S620: No), the opening time and the number of opening of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 are set to “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. After setting (S621), the process proceeds to S623. On the other hand, in the process of S620, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in a short time (S620: Yes), the opening time and the number of opening of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 are set to “1 second × “Twice” is set (S622), and the process proceeds to S623.

  In the process of S623, the opening time determined in the process of S621 or S622 and the opening / closing control start of the number of times of opening are set (S623), and this process ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S623, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1006) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S621 or S622 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S619, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S619: No), each process of S620 to S623 is skipped, and this process ends.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the game ball is passed. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 if there is.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the game ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the game ball does not pass through the normal entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the game ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203g is 4. If not less than this (S703: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the number of normal symbol holding balls The value (M) of the counter 203g is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203. (S705), and this process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S915. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S915 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S915. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1015 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S915, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S915). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. Main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S916, S917) after sending out the payout initialization command.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S916, S917) is executed. Similarly, the initialization processing (S916, S917) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S916, S917), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S916), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S917). After the process of S917 is completed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. After the processing of S910 is completed, the probability change flag 203h, the short-time / medium counter 203i, the entrance waiting flag 203j, and the big hit / medium flag 203m are read (S911), and the read probability change flag 203h, the time-shortage counter 203i, and the entrance standby flag 203j, a state command for notifying the gaming state indicated by the jackpot flag 203m is set (S912). After the process of S912 is completed, the driving start of the rotating body motor 670c is set (S913), the interruption is permitted (S914), and the process proceeds to a main process described later. The setting of driving of the rotating body motor 670c set by the process of S913 is not changed until the power is turned off. Thereby, while the power is supplied to the gaming machine, the rotating member 670a can be continuously rotated at a constant speed. Therefore, in the big hit waiting state, the game ball is aimed at a timing at which the rotation position of the rotation member 670a is arranged so as not to prevent the game ball from flowing down (flying) in the direction of the operation winning opening 660. Since it can be fired, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of launching the game ball in a timely manner. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the rotating member 670a is continuously rotated at a constant speed while power is supplied to the gaming machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the big hit standby state, the rotational position of the rotating member 670a only needs to be configured to be variable between an arrangement that prevents entry into the operation winning opening 660 and an arrangement that does not hinder, for example, during the big hit standby state. Only the rotation member 670a may be rotated at a constant speed, and the operation may be stopped in other states.

  In the first embodiment, the rotational speed of the rotating member 670a is configured to be constant. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotational speed and the rotational direction are randomly or regularly. It is good also as a variable structure. By configuring in this way, the difficulty level of entering the game ball into the operation winning opening 660 becomes higher. Therefore, when the game ball enters the operation winning opening 660 as intended, the player is more Can please.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 21) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) or the start winning process (see FIG. 24) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information command set in the start winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when the gaming state is changed, a state command for notifying the change of the gaming state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a game ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the big hit waiting state, the ball entering the operation winning port 660 is monitored, A jackpot start process for starting a jackpot is executed when a ball entering the operating winning opening 660 is detected (S1004). Details of the jackpot start process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of S1004 is completed, then, in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed, and the jackpot control for opening or closing the right specific winning port 65a and the left specific winning port 650a of the variable winning device 65 Processing is executed (S1005). In the jackpot control process, the right specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1) or the left specific winning opening 650a is opened for each jackpot round, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has passed or the specified number of game balls have been won. To do. When either of these conditions is satisfied, the right specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1) or the left specific winning opening 650a is closed. Here, in this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of the jackpot control process (S1005) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1005 is completed, next, an electrical accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electrical accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1006). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S621 or the processing of S622 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1007). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 23), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) or the process of S309 is completed, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 23). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update processing, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the processing of S615 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 26) or the processing of S616, the second symbol display device 83 is set. The variable display is started at. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display device 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a normal symbol (2nd symbol) alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S618 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update processing. The display of the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S612 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 26) or the processing of S613. (Lights up).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs a power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1010). ) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the processes after S1001 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S1010: No), the time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the next main processing execution timing is reached. Within the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011 and S1012).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value (both 399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant but varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1009, if the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 28 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1013 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1009 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. When the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can start from S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the details of the jackpot start process (S1004) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This jackpot start process (S1004) is a process for monitoring the entrance to the operation winning opening 660 as described above, and starting the jackpot when the entrance is detected.

  In this jackpot start process (see FIG. 31), first, it is determined whether or not the ball waiting flag 203j is on (S1101), and when it is determined that the ball waiting flag 203j is off (S1101: No), This means that the current state is not a jackpot standby state, so this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1101 that the ball waiting flag 203j is on (S1101: Yes), it means that the current state is a jackpot standby state, so next, the operation winning prize opening 660 is entered. It is determined whether or not an incoming ball has been detected (S1102). In the process of S1102, when it is determined that the ball entering the operation winning opening 660 has not been detected (S1102: No), this process is terminated as it is not the big hit start timing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1102 that a ball entering the operation winning opening 660 has been detected (S1102: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203k is set to ON while the jackpot start flag 203k is set to ON (S1103). ). Then, the big hit waiting state is terminated by setting the incoming ball waiting flag 203j to OFF (S1104), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1005). This jackpot control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or the right specific winning prize opening 65a and a process for opening or closing the left specific winning opening 650a.

  In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32), it is first determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203k is on (that is, whether or not the jackpot start is set) (S1201). If it is determined in the processing of S1201 that the jackpot start flag 203k is on (S1201: Yes), an opening command for notifying the start of the jackpot opening period is set (S1202). The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. In the first embodiment, the opening period is set to 0.1 second, and one round is started with almost no time difference after the game ball has entered the operation winning opening 660 (the door 65f1 is opened). It is configured. With this configuration, the game ball that is flowing down the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 at the time of entering the operating winning opening 660 can be made to enter the right specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to enter the game ball into the operation winning opening 660. After the process of S1202, the big hit medium flag 203m is set to ON and the big hit start flag 203k is set to OFF (S1203), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1201 that the jackpot flag 203j is off (S1201: No), it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203m is on (whether the special symbol is jackpot) (S1204). . In the process of S1204, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203m is off (no special symbol jackpot) (S1204: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1204, if it is determined that the big hit flag 203m is on (S1204: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1205). If (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening corresponding to the number of rounds is set to open (S1206). More specifically, if this time is the start timing of the first round, the right specific winning opening 65a is set to an open state by opening the door 65f1, and if it is not the first round, the left specific winning opening 650a is set. Set to open. When the processing of S1206 ends, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1207), and this processing ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1205, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1205: No), whether or not the closing condition for the specific winning opening (the right specific winning opening 65a or the left specific winning opening 650a) is satisfied. Determination is made (S1208). Specifically, if the current round period is one round, a game has elapsed after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the right specific winning opening 65a is opened or the right specific winning opening 65a is opened. When it is detected that two or more balls have won the right specific winning opening 65a, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied. Further, if the current round period is other than the first round, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the left specific winning opening 650a is opened, or the left specific winning opening 650a is opened. When it is detected that ten or more game balls have won at the left specific winning opening 650a, it is determined that the closing condition has been established.

  In the process of S1208, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (the right specific winning opening 65a or the left specific winning opening 650a) is satisfied (S1208: Yes), the specific winning opening set in the open state The closing of (the right specific winning port 65a or the left specific winning port 650a) is set (S1209), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1208 that the specific winning opening closing condition is not satisfied (S1208: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1210). Specifically, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect when all rounds in the special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual are completed.

  In the process of S1210, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1210: Yes), an ending command is set (S1211), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1210, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1210: No), it is then determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1212), and it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending effect. If this is the case (S1212: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1212 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1212: Yes), whether or not the current jackpot is a probable jackpot (any of jackpots A, B, D, E) is determined. Determination is made (S1213).

  If it is determined in the process of S1213 that the probability variation is not a big hit (that is, a normal big hit) (S1213: No), the value of the hour / medium counter 203i is overwritten with 100, so that 100 normal symbols are displayed after the jackpot ends. The setting is made so that the short time period is given (S1214), and the process proceeds to S1216. On the other hand, in the process of S1213, when it is determined that the current jackpot is a probable change jackpot (S1213: Yes), by turning on the probability change flag 203h, a probabilistic change state of a special symbol is given after the jackpot ends. (S1215), and the process proceeds to S1216.

  In the process of S1214 executed after the process of S1214 or the process of S1215, the gaming state after the jackpot is finished (the special symbol is probable and the normal symbol is in the short-time state, the special symbol is in a low probability state, In addition, a state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of whether or not the normal symbol is in a short time state is set (S1216), the end of the jackpot is set (S1217), and the process is terminated.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, referring to FIG. 33, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S4117 (see FIG. 34) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 34, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 34), it executes a power-off process in S4117. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S4117 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S4002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off process in S4117 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S4117, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008. .

  In the process of S4002, if the power-off process in progress flag is on (S4002: Yes), the startup process this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S4117, This was started by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004), and then it is determined whether each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S4005). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  In the process of S4005, if it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set ( S4006), the process proceeds to S4008. By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223.

  On the other hand, if a reading / writing check abnormality is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 in the processing of S4005 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. . The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S4117 is executed (see S4117 in FIG. 34). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4117 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S4008. This is a case after the power failure has occurred and started in a state where the execution of the power-off process of S4117 has been completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  After the processing of S4010, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 analyzes the state command notification content set in the startup processing (see FIG. 29) (S4011), and the gaming state storage area 223i according to the analysis result. Is updated (S4012). Thereby, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped since the power is turned on. After the processing of S4012, interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the process proceeds to the main processing.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S4008 is reached because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S4004 to S4006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the processes of S4010 to S4013 are executed, and the process proceeds to the main process.

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S4009 is that when the process from S4004 to S4006 is reached via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous processing of S4101 was executed (S4101). If not (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4112 without performing the processes in S4102 to S4111. In step S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed. S4102 to S4111 are mainly processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4112 and the variation display setting process of S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the process of S4113 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later is set (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of turning on a hold lamp (not shown) according to the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S4107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during the high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S4107 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  When the process of S4109 ends, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process in S4108 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S4109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S4110 is completed, an effect update process is next executed (S4111), and the process proceeds to S4112. In the effect update process (S4111), the effect state (the number of gauges of the chance meter CM (see FIGS. 7A and 7B)) of the effect in the standby state executed in the jackpot standby state is changed to the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. Control that varies according to the detection result is executed. Details of the effect update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4112, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S4112). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S4113). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of the change display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If it is determined in the processing of S4114 that the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S4114: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are set to ON (S4116), and the power interruption is performed. The process is executed (S4117). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S4118), and then the process loops infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the details of the effect update process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this effect update processing (S4111). This effect update process (S4111) is a process for updating the effect mode in the standby state effect as described above.

  In the effect update process (see FIG. 35), first, it is determined whether or not the standby state effect flag 223g is on (S4201). If it is determined that it is off (S4201: No), the present is the execution of the standby state effect. Since it is not in the middle (there is no possibility of updating the production mode), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that the standby state effect flag 223g is on (S4201: Yes), the number of sensors whose output is H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f is counted ( (S4202).

  When the process of S4202 ends, it is determined whether or not the count value (count value) obtained by the process of S4202 matches the counter value of the level counter 223h (S4203). As described above, the level counter 223h is a counter indicating the number of gauges of the chance meter CM displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The gauge number of the chance meter CM is varied in conjunction with the number of sensors whose outputs are H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. Therefore, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the count value of the level counter 223h is different from the count value in the process of S4202 (S4203: No), the number of game balls on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 has changed. This means that the display mode of the chance meter CM is different from the number of sensors whose output is H (high), so the count value (count value) in the process of S4202 is overwritten with the value of the level counter 223g. To update it (S4204). Then, the mode of the chance meter CM is updated to the mode of the number of gauges corresponding to the value of the level counter 223g updated in the process of S4204 (S4205), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the count value (count value) obtained by the process of S4202 matches the value of the level counter 223g (S4203: Yes), the current passage detection sensors 228a to 228f Since the output and the number of gauges of the chance meter CM match and there is no need to update the display mode of the chance meter CM (the production mode of the standby state effect), the processes of S4204 and S4205 are skipped and remain as they are. This process ends.

  By executing this effect update process (see FIG. 35), the mode of the chance meter CM can be updated in correspondence with the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. Therefore, with reference to the mode of the chance meter CM, it is possible to play a game with the aim of entering the game ball into the operation winning opening 660 while the mode has a larger number of gauges. That is, it is possible to make it easier to understand the timing at which the player should aim for the operation winning opening 660. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for a player who has little experience playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 to intuitively understand the timing for aiming at the operation winning opening 660. Thereby, since the player who plays a game for the first time can be made to play a game easily, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, during the execution of the standby state effect, every time the effect update process (see FIG. 35) is executed, the output status of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f and the chance meter CM by the process of S4203. Although it has been configured to determine whether there is a discrepancy with the number of gauges (whether the mode of the chance meter CM should be updated), the frequency of updating the mode of the chance meter CM may be reduced. Specifically, for example, during the execution of the standby state effect, the process of S4203 may be executed only once every 0.5 seconds. With this configuration, the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  Next, a command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4112). This command determination processing (S4112) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. Process.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S4301). If it is determined in step S4301 that a variation pattern command has been received (S4301: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S4302), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S4303), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 38) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4301 that a variation pattern command has not been received (S4301: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4304). When the stop type command is received (S4304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4305), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4306). End the process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4304, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S4304: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserve ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4307). . If it is determined that the held ball number command has been received (S4307: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Value (the number N1 of the variable display hold based on the first special symbol lottery) or the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number N2 of the variable display hold based on the second special symbol) is extracted. Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4308). In the processing of S4308, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is set. . After the process of S4308 ends, this process ends.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is the main controller 110 when the game ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, every time a start winning is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 and the second one are performed by the processing of S4308. The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f. Therefore, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are affected by noise and the like, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110 is changed. Even if it deviates from the value of 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 are detected at the time of detection of the start winning prize or when the special symbol is drawn. The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110. When the process of S4308 is executed, the display holding ball for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c. A number command is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S4307, when it is determined that a pending ball number command has not been received (S4307: No), it is then determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4309). And when it determines with having received the state command (S4309: Yes), the data of the game state storage area 223i are updated according to the received command (S4310). That is, when the probability change state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol are notified based on the information according to the gaming state notified by the state command, the lower 2 bits of the gaming state storage area 223i are set to “11B”. When the low probability state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol are notified, the lower 2 bits of the gaming state storage area 223i are set to “01B”, the low probability state of the special symbol, and When the normal state of the normal symbol is notified, the lower 2 bits of the gaming state storage area 223i are set to “00B”. Thereby, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4309 that no status command has been received (S4309: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received (S4311). If it is determined in the process of S4311 that a winning information command has been received (S4311: Yes), the information notified by the received winning information command (the type of the entrance that detected the new start winning and the lottery result) Information) is stored in the corresponding storage area of the winning information storage area 223a (S4312), and this process is terminated.

  If it is determined in the process of S4311 that a winning information command has not been received (S4311: No), then a command related to winning (any one of a standby state command, an opening command, a round number command, and an ending command) is displayed. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S4313). If it is determined that a hit-related command has been received (S4313: Yes), a hit-related process for executing control corresponding to the type of the hit-related command is executed (S4314). The process ends. Details of the hit-related processing (S4314) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S4313 that a command related to the jackpot has not been received (S4313: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4315), and this processing is terminated. In the process of S4315, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is executed. The command is set so as to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the hit-related process (S4314) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the hit-related processing (S4314).

  In the hit-related processing, first, it is determined whether or not a standby state command has been received (S4401). A command is set (S4402). The display standby state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display standby state command, the display control device 114 starts a standby state effect for informing that the third symbol display device 81 is in the jackpot standby state. When the process of S4402 ends, next, the standby state effect flag 223g is set to ON to indicate that the standby state effect is being executed (S4403), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4401 that the standby state command has not been received (S4401: No), it is then determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S4404), and the opening command has been received. If this is the case (S4404: Yes), a display opening command for starting the opening effect is set (S4405), and the end of the standby state effect is set by turning off the standby state effect flag 223g (S4406). The process ends. The display opening command set in the process of S4405 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts an opening effect for notifying the start of the jackpot in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4404 that the opening command has not been received (S4404: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4407). If it is determined that a round number command has been received (S4407: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command, and a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set (S4408). ). The display round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S4408, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4407 that no round number command has been received (S4407: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4409). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S4409: Yes), a display ending command for starting an ending effect is set (S4410), and the process ends. The display opening command set in the process of S4410 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts an ending effect for notifying the end of the jackpot in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4409 that an ending command has not been received (S4409: No), this process ends. By executing the hit-related processing (see FIG. 37), appropriate control can be executed according to various commands related to the win.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S4501). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S4501: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S4506. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4501 that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S4501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S4502), and then S4303 of the command determination process (see FIG. 36). In this process, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4503).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4504). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4505), and the process proceeds to S4506. In the process of S4505, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area.

  In the processing of S4506, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S4506). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S4506: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display The setting process (see FIG. 38) ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S4506: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to off (S4507), and then the process of S4306 in the command determination process (see FIG. 36). In step S4508, the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223. Next, a display stop type command is set based on the stop type acquired in the process of S4508 (S4509), and this process ends. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, and controls the third symbol display device 81 to display the stop of the third symbol with the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. Is done.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 53. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply apparatus 115 to the display control apparatus 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program is stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. Is a memory from which data can be read at high speed. Therefore, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the first flash memory in the NOR type flash memory 234d. The boot program stored in the program storage area 234d1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory 234a has a low read speed particularly when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads out and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. A predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 39). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 39) (S6105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR flash memory 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR type flash memory 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 40, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in step S6101. In addition, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S6102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is canceled. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S6005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 51A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S7602 in FIG. 51A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41 (b)), the simple command so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 16 is drawn. Determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 41B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 41B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variation effect is given. When the main control device 110 is connected via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and simple variation is performed. Production can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image continues to be displayed when the power is turned on. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41B, a V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed. It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 41B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S6301: No), it means that transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, the normal effect image is displayed instead of the power-on image. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a back image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the back image after change is sent to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction for transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 20 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of a display stop type command is detected, it corresponds to the stop type (big hit A to F, front / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out) indicated by the display stop type command The stop type table and the stop type counter to be compared are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 47, the details of the above-described command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 42, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 43A, details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described. FIG. 43A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. The buffer 233d is set (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6504, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S6502. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 43B, details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described. FIG. 43B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to stop type information (any one of big hits A to F, front / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach, complete release) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41B) is executed. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned on. (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the task process (S6304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S6602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display standby state command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is a display standby state command (S6408: Yes), standby state command processing is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 44, the details of the standby state command processing (S6409) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing standby state command processing. This standby state command process executes a process corresponding to the standby state command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the standby state command processing, first, a standby state effect display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the standby state effect display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set standby state effect display data table. (S6703). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6705), the standby state command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6408 that there is no standby state command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display opening is performed. If there is a command (S6410: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6803). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6410 that there is no display opening command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is a round number command for use (S6412: Yes), the round number command processing is executed (S6413), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6902).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the round number command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6412 that there is no display round number command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is an ending command for use (S6414: Yes), ending command processing is executed (S6415), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S7001). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S7002).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S7001, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S7003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7003). S7004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S7005), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6414 that there is no display ending command (S6414: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If there is a change command (S6416: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the rear image change command process (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7603) of the back image change accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the on state is set to on (S7101). . Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag provided for each back image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the other The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to OFF (S7102), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S7101 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S7102. .

  Also, in the task processing (S6304), if it is specified that either the back A or B is displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S7102 The rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S7102, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S6416 that there is no rear image change command (S6416: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6418). If this is the case (S6418: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6419), and processing returns to S6401.

  Details of the error command process (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S7202). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process (S6303), when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S7202 is determined, and the error Processing is executed so that a warning image corresponding to the type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S7202 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no error command in the processing of S6418 (S6418: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6420), and the processing returns to S6401.

  In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processes of S6402 to S6420 are executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6420 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41B), the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction and processing corresponding to each command, ie, variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 43 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 43 (b)), and other commands are as follows: The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 43A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48 to FIG. 50, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 48, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7301). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7301: No). ), It is determined that a new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S7302 to S7304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S7302), and S7303 to S7304. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7303: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7304).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7401).

  In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, etc. are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7304) or in the process of S7303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S7303: No), the process proceeds to S7305.

  In S7305, pointer update processing is executed (S7305). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7501). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S7501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S7502). As a result, if it is End information (S7502: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7503). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7503: Yes), the display data is displayed. Time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7504), and the process proceeds to S7507.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7503: No), the display data table is the standby state effect display data table. (S7505: Yes), the standby time effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is set to the effect time of the standby state effect display data table. The corresponding time data is set in the time counter 233h (S7506), and the process proceeds to S7507.

  In the process of S7507, the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7507), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7505, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the standby state effect display data table (S7505: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1. (S7508), the process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7502: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7306). In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S7306 together with the warning image previously expanded, and for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S7307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S7308). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S7308: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S7309).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7309: No), the confirmed display data table has not been performed yet, and the confirmed display effect is at the timing for performing the confirmed display, so first the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S7310), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S7311). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7313). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 as it is. (S7315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233d to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S6304), until the predetermined time elapses after the change is started, the previous stop pattern determination flag set in S7315 is specified and the stop effect of the change effect performed immediately before is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7309, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7316). If the demo display flag is off (S7316: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain time has elapsed since the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, a display data table for demonstration is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7317), and the contents are cleared by writing null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7318). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7321), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S7316, if the demonstration display flag is on (S7316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. A process of setting a display data table that stipulates to stop displaying the image in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 51A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S7602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S7601, that is, if it is off (S7601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7602).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S7701), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S7701: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S7702). In the process of S7702, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S7702 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7702: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7702: Yes), the process proceeds to S7703. Also, as a result of the process of S7701, when the transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7701: No), the process proceeds to S7703.

  In the process of S7703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7703). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7704), and this process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S7703 (S7703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7705), and this processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 41B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 41B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 42 to 47) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 48 to 50) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. The subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) (see S7601: No in FIG. 51A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (see FIG. 51A and S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7603).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e is updated by the pointer update process (S7305) of the display setting process (see S6303 in FIG. 48) executed earlier. The information described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is acquired (S7801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7802). If it is transfer data information (S7802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S7803, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S7804), and the process proceeds to step S7805.

  In the process of S7802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7802: No), the process of S7803 and S7804 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7805. In the processing of S7805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S7805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7805: Yes), it is further determined whether transfer of image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7806).

  In the process of S7806, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S7806 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7806: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7806: Yes), the process proceeds to S7807. Also, as a result of the process of S7805, when the transfer instruction of image data is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S7805: No), the process proceeds to S7807.

  In the process of S7807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7807). If the transfer start flag is on (S7807: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7803 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S7813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7807: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S7809). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S7809: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S7810), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S7811). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The head address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S7812), and the process proceeds to S7813.

  In the process of S7813, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813). The determination in the process of S7813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7813 (S7813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7813 (S7813: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S7814). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S7814, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7815), and this normal image transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed previously, and as a result, the process is indicated by the display stop type command. When it is determined that the stop type information is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) The drawing list (see FIG. 20) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the color setting information (filter information) and the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7901). That is, in the process of S7901, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of each sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the head address (storage head address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is developed, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7902, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7903). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 41B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the open / close door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 from which a winning ball is paid out when a game ball enters during a big hit is closed, and the right specific winning opening 65a is closed. In a state where it is impossible to enter the game ball, the game ball can flow down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. The upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 is configured to allow the number of game balls exceeding the number of balls entered (that is, two) as the end condition of the first round to flow down simultaneously. In other words, the number of balls (that is, two balls) that is the end condition of the first round from the time when one game ball reaches the upper surface of the door 65f1 to the time when it passes through the upper surface of the door 65f1. A larger number of game balls can be made to reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. As a result, at the timing when the first round is started (the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened), the more gaming balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the more gaming balls flowing down the opening / closing door 65f1. The player can enter the right specific winning opening 65a from the opened open / close door 65f1 to obtain more prize balls. Therefore, at the start timing of the big hit, the game can be performed by paying attention to the number of game balls flowing down on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1, so that the player's interest at the start of the first round is improved. Can be made.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when a special symbol lottery is won, the jackpot is started when a game ball enters the operating winning opening 660. Thereby, the player can adjust the timing at which the first round of jackpot is started by adjusting the timing of launching the game ball toward the operation winning opening 660, which is more advantageous for the player. It is possible to achieve a game property in which a game ball enters the operation winning opening 660 aiming at timing (that is, timing when more game balls pass through the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1). Therefore, the amount of prize balls (privileges) that can be obtained by the player during a predetermined period (until the end of one round) can be varied according to the skill of the player (timing for the action winning opening 660). The timing at which the game ball enters the operating winning opening 660 can be taken more seriously. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the player receives a game ball when the game ball is entered into the operation winning opening 660 in the jackpot waiting state after the jackpot is determined until the jackpot is started. The standard of the benefits (number of prize balls) that can be made is suggested to the player by the production mode (number of gauges of the chance meter CM). By comprising in this way, the timing which should aim at the operation | movement winning opening 660 can be made easier to understand. Therefore, even a player who has little experience playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 can realize easy-to-understand gameplay, and therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is difficult to avoid. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, by providing the three convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1, the game ball is configured to bypass the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c. Although the passage period passing through 65f1 is configured to be long, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to providing the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c, the material of the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 is made to have a coefficient of friction more than other portions (the surface of the game board 13, the inner surface of the right variable winning device 65, etc.). May be made of a large material (for example, an elastic body), or may be processed to make it difficult for the game ball to roll (for example, an uneven surface is provided).

  In the first embodiment, 30 seconds have passed since the start of the first round, or the first round when two or more game balls have entered the right specific winning opening 65a before 30 seconds have passed. Was configured to terminate. In other words, if the player has made a right-hand hit, the end condition is set so that the upper limit number (2) of game balls are almost surely entered the right specific winning opening 65a and the first round is completed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the first round may be completed in a period of a length that makes it difficult to enter the game ball even if the player hits the right specific winning opening 65a after the first round is started. . Specifically, for example, one round occurs when 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of one round, or when 10 or more game balls have won the right specific winning opening 65a before 0.5 seconds have passed. It is good also as a structure which closes eyes. In such a configuration, if no game ball is passing through the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation winning opening 660, no single game ball enters the right specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to provide a game that increases the possibility that the first round will end without making a ball. Therefore, the player who wants to win a prize ball in the first round is made to launch the game ball toward the open / close door 65f1 before the game ball is entered into the operation winning opening 660 in the big hit waiting state. It is possible to entertain the gameability of aiming at the operating winning port 660 later. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the big hit waiting state of the player.

  In the first embodiment, in the big hit waiting state, a guide for the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 is indicated by the number of gauges of the chance meter CM. The configuration suggests the degree of advantage in the case of a ball, but is not limited thereto. For example, a configuration that suggests an advantageous degree of jackpot by the number of gauges of the chance meter CM may be adopted. Specifically, for example, the jackpot type may be suggested based on the number of gauges of the chance meter CM, and the player may be instructed of the degree of advantage when the game ball is inserted into the operation winning opening 660. Alternatively, for example, the jackpot round number may be determined to be indefinite when the jackpot is determined, and the jackpot round number may be drawn at the timing when the operation winning opening 660 is passed. Then, by suggesting the number of rounds determined by the lottery executed when the game ball is inserted into the operation winning opening 660 according to the number of gauges, when the game ball is inserted into the operation winning opening 660 It is good also as a structure which suggests an advantageous degree to a player.

  In the first embodiment, the rotating member 670a is continuously rotated at a constant speed while power is supplied to the gaming machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the big hit standby state, the rotational position of the rotating member 670a only needs to be configured to be variable between an arrangement that prevents entry into the operation winning opening 660 and an arrangement that does not hinder, for example, during the big hit standby state. Only the rotation member 670a may be rotated at a constant speed, and the operation may be stopped in other states.

  In the first embodiment, the rotation member 670a is configured to have a constant rotation speed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation speed and the rotation direction can be varied randomly or regularly. It is good also as a structure. By configuring in this way, the difficulty level of entering the game ball into the operation winning opening 660 becomes higher. Therefore, when the game ball enters the operation winning opening 660 as intended, the player is more Can please.

  In the first embodiment, the standby state effect suggests the degree of advantage (the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round) when a big win is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the degree of advantage when a big hit is started, a configuration may be used in which an effect suggesting the degree of advantage of the jackpot itself is performed by a standby state effect. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to execute an effect that suggests a gaming state after a jackpot (whether or not it is a promising big hit), the number of rounds, and the like. In addition, when an effect that suggests the degree of advantage of the jackpot itself is executed, it may not be executed during the jackpot standby state. For example, at the time of stop display of the third symbol, the degree of advantage of the jackpot itself may be suggested during execution depending on the type of the third symbol. Moreover, you may suggest the advantageous degree of jackpot itself in an opening period, a round period, an ending period, etc.

  In the first embodiment, a description was given by taking the pachinko machine 10 of a type in which a big hit is started by lottery of special symbols and a big hit is started when a game ball enters the operation winning opening 660, but different specifications are used. You may apply to the pachinko machine 10 of. For example, the present invention may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 where a big hit is started when a game ball enters a specific area on the game board 13. That is, a pachinko machine 10 of a type that does not have a special symbol lottery function itself (so-called two types) and a special symbol lottery function are installed, but what is a special symbol lottery result? Irrespective of this, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 of a type in which a big hit is started when a game ball enters a specific area (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type). By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the advantage of the first round of jackpot depending on the number of game balls on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 at the time of entering the game balls into the specific area.

Second Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 to 62, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when a special symbol lottery is won, the game shifts to a jackpot standby state, and the game ball is inserted into the operation winning opening 660 during the jackpot standby state. The jackpot was started in the event of a failure. Further, the operation winning opening 660 is configured to be provided only at one place on the upper right side of the game board 13. That is, in the case of the jackpot waiting state, regardless of the jackpot type, the jackpot will start unless the game ball is launched toward the upper right side of the game board 13 and the game ball is entered into the operation winning opening 660. It was not configured.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the operation winning holes (right operation winning port 661, left operation winning port 662) that trigger the jackpot start on the upper right side and the lower left side of the game board 13, respectively. In accordance with the jackpot type, the winning winning opening that triggers the jackpot start is made different. Further, the left operation winning opening 662 is configured so that a game ball enters almost automatically in a relatively short time (about 0.5 seconds) when the jackpot standby state is entered. In other words, in the case of the jackpot type that triggers the start of the jackpot, the left action winning opening 662 is configured such that the first round of jackpot is started before the game ball reaches the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. . That is, the jackpot type is set so that the player cannot aim for an overwinning in the first round. As a result, a jackpot type that can aim for over winning and a jackpot type that can not aim for over winning can be set, so in addition to the number of rounds and the gaming state after jackpot, the degree of advantage for each jackpot type A difference can be provided.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main controller 110. In addition, the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. The process is partly changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 54, the board surface structure of the game board 13 in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 54, on the upper right side of the game board 13 as viewed from the front, a right operation winning hole 661 into which a game ball can be inserted is provided instead of the operation winning hole 660 in the first embodiment. The right operation winning opening 661 is an operation winning that triggers the start of 6 types of jackpots A2, B2, D2, F2 to H2 among the 8 types of jackpots (big hits A2 to H2) in the second embodiment. The mouth. This right operation winning opening 661 is used only when the jackpot waiting state is shifted to when one of the above six types of jackpots (jackpots A2, B2, D2, F2 to H2) is made in a special symbol lottery. It is configured to be determined to be valid.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 54, a left operation winning opening 662 into which a game ball can enter is provided on the lower left side of the first entrance 64 in front view. The left operation winning opening 662 is an operation winning opening that triggers the start of two types of jackpots C2 and E2 among the eight types of jackpots (big hits A2 to H2) in the second embodiment. In other words, this is an operation winning opening in which a game ball is determined to be valid in a jackpot waiting state in which a special jackpot C2 or E2 is triggered by a special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 54, a storage device 675 is provided above the left operation winning opening 662 in a front view. The storage device 675 is configured to be able to store only one game ball that has flowed down vertically. The storage device 675 receives and stores the game ball that has entered the storage device 675 at the lower end of the flow path that is configured with a width that allows one game ball to flow down (prevents the game ball from flowing down). A storage valve 675a that can be changed between a possible closed position and an open position in which the game ball is discharged directly below the storage device 675 without hindering the flow of the game ball that has entered the storage device 675 is provided. Yes.

  The storage valve 675a of the storage device 675 is changed to the open position when the big hit standby state is set, and is changed to the closed position at the end of the big hit. As shown in FIG. 54, since the left operation winning port 662 is disposed directly below the storage device 675, when the game ball is stored in the storage device 675, the storage valve 675a is in a standby state. As a result of the game balls stored by being released flowing down, the game balls enter the left operation winning opening 662 immediately after the big hit standby state (after about 0.5 seconds). Here, in a normal time (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol), it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second entrance 640 (the electric accessory 640a is difficult to open). The game method with the least loss for the player is to aim at the first entrance 64 by left-handed. When the game ball is launched aiming at the first entrance 64, the game ball also flows down toward the storage device 675 disposed on the lower left side of the first entrance 64. Thereby, in a normal time, the game ball is almost stored in the storage device 675 until the big hit. Therefore, when the big hit C2 or E2 becomes normal, the big hit is started almost immediately after the big hit standby state. For this reason, when the jackpot C2, E2, it becomes almost impossible to reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 during the jackpot standby state because the period of the jackpot standby state is too short, and over winning a prize It becomes impossible to aim. For this reason, the possibility that the number of winnings in the first round of jackpot will be at a minimum (two) is extremely high. As a result, compared to the first round of other jackpots, the number of winning balls can be disadvantageous. Become.

  In this way, in the first embodiment, in the jackpot type (big jackpot A2, B2, D2, F2 to H2) that triggers the right jackpot 661 to start the jackpot, the first round as in the first embodiment. While it is possible to play a game with the game characteristics of acquiring more award balls aiming for an over winning, the jackpot type (big hit C2, E2) that triggers the start of a big hit is almost over winning The jackpot will start shortly after aiming. As a result, the advantage degree in the first round of jackpot can be differentiated according to the jackpot type, so that when the player wins, the player can be focused on the jackpot type. Therefore, the interest of the player can be further improved. In the following, for simplification of explanation, the type of jackpot that is started when the player enters the right-operated winning hole 661 is referred to as “right trigger jackpot” and the player enters the left-operated winning hole 662. A jackpot type that starts with a ball as a trigger is referred to as a “left trigger jackpot”.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. Note that the ROM 202 of the second embodiment is only partially changed from the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above in the content of the first hit type selection table 202b. This is the same as the first embodiment described above. Therefore, as the description of the ROM 202 in the second embodiment, only the details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b specified in the ROM 202 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 55, in the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment, five types of big hit types (big hits A2 to E2) that can be determined when the first special symbol lottery is won. And three types of jackpot types (big jackpots F2 to H2) that can be determined when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery.

  As a big hit of the first special symbol, a range of “0-4” of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit A2” (see 202b1 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are five counter values that become “big hit A2”, so “big hit A2” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 5% (5/100). This “big jackpot A2” has eight rounds as in the “big jackpot A” in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, “special symbol probable state” and “ordinary symbol time-short state” are given. The jackpot type. Further, the “big hit A2” is a kind of right opportunity big hit that is started when a ball enters the right operation winning opening 661. For this reason, if the game ball can enter the right operation winning opening 660 with more game balls reaching the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 during the jackpot waiting state, the normal (one round is started) The number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round is likely to be more advantageous than the left opportunity jackpot.

  As a jackpot of the first special symbol, a range of “5 to 14” of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “Big Jack B2” (see 202b2 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that become “big hit B2”, so “big hit B2” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This “big jackpot B2” has five rounds like the “big jackpot B” in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, “probability of special symbols” and “short time status of normal symbols” are given. The jackpot type. Further, the “big hit B2” is a kind of right opportunity big hit that is started when the player enters the right action winning opening 661 as in the case of the “big hit A2”. For this reason, the number of winning balls that can be obtained in the first round is likely to be advantageous as compared to the left opportunity jackpot.

  As a jackpot of the first special symbol, a range of “15 to 64” of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “jackpot C2” (see 202b3 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 50 counter values that become “big hit C2”, so “big hit C2” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This “big jackpot C2” has five rounds in the same way as the “big jackpot B” in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, a “special symbol probable state” and a “normal symbol short-time state” are given. The jackpot type. Further, the “big hit C2” is a type of left trigger jackpot that is started when the player enters the left act winning opening 662. For this reason, the number of winning balls that can be obtained in the first round is likely to be disadvantageous as compared to the right opportunity jackpot.

  As a jackpot of the first special symbol, a range of “65-74” of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “Big Jack D2” (see 202b4 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that become “big hit D2”, so “big hit D2” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This “big jackpot D2” has five rounds like the “big jackpot C” in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, “low probability state of special symbol” and “short time state of normal symbol” are granted Is a jackpot type. Further, the “big hit D2” is a kind of right opportunity big hit that is started when a ball enters the right operation winning opening 661. For this reason, the number of winning balls that can be obtained in the first round is likely to be advantageous as compared to the left opportunity jackpot.

  As a jackpot of the first special symbol, a “jackpot E2” is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “75 to 99” (see 202b5 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 25 counter values that become “big hit E2”, so “big hit E2” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 25% (25/100). This “big jackpot E2” has five rounds, like the “big jackpot C” in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, “low probability state of special symbol” and “short time state of normal symbol” are granted. Is a jackpot type. Further, the “jackpot E2” is a type of left trigger jackpot that is started when a ball enters the left operation winning opening 662. For this reason, the number of winning balls that can be obtained in the first round is likely to be disadvantageous as compared to the right opportunity jackpot.

  In this way, in the second embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the right opportunity big hit (any one of the big hits A2, B2 and D2) is set at 25%, and the rate is 75%. The left trigger jackpot (one of jackpot C2 or E2) is configured. That is, it is possible to play a game with a game aiming at the right action winning opening 661 in a timely manner after allowing more game balls to reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 during the jackpot waiting state. This is 25% of the big win in the lottery. Most of them (75%) are jackpots that immediately start (in about 0.5 seconds) after the jackpot is on standby. You can make it more pleasing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the jackpot of the second special symbol is composed only of the right opportunity jackpot. Therefore, when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big win is always started when the game ball has entered the right operation winning opening 661. The reason for this is that the lottery of the second special symbol is executed basically during the “short-time state of the normal symbol”. This is because the game ball is highly likely not to be stored in the storage device 675 at the start of the jackpot standby state because it is during firing. In other words, even if it is configured to provide a left trigger jackpot in the jackpot of the second special symbol, there is a high possibility that the jackpot cannot be started immediately after the jackpot waiting state, so the left trigger jackpot is not used in vain, Only right opportunity jackpot is provided. Thereby, since the jackpot type can be reduced, the storage capacity of the storage area for storing data for each jackpot type can be reduced.

  Each jackpot (big hit F2 to H2) of the second special symbol in the second embodiment, each jackpot (big hit D to F) of the second special symbol in the first embodiment, the number of rounds and the gaming state after the jackpot Is exactly the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the second embodiment, the configuration is such that when the second special symbol is a jackpot, the right trigger jackpot is always set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the second special symbol is a jackpot, the left trigger jackpot may be configured at a predetermined rate (for example, 10%). As described above, when a lottery is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the possibility that game balls are stored in the storage device 675 is low. In this case, the game ball does not immediately enter the left operation winning opening 662. Therefore, in the case of a big hit in the left opportunity, it is possible to provide the gameability for measuring the timing of entering the game ball into the left operation winning opening 662. In other words, it is possible to vary the operation winning opening aimed at during the jackpot standby state depending on whether the right trigger jackpot or the left trigger jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to diversify game variations during the jackpot waiting state.

  Next, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 56, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 13) in that a start opportunity storage area 203n is added. Yes. Since other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The start opportunity storage area 203n is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the operation winning prize opening that becomes a jackpot start opportunity. More specifically, when “01H” is stored as data in the start opportunity storage area 203n, the big hit start opportunity is the right action winning opening 661 (this big hit is the right big hit jackpot). When “02H” is stored, it means that the start trigger for the jackpot is the left operation winning opening 662 (this jackpot is the left trigger jackpot). The start opportunity storage area 203n is set to “00H” as an initial value. When the special symbol lottery is won, the data corresponding to the current jackpot type is overwritten when the jackpot standby state is entered ( (See S232 in FIG. 57). During the jackpot waiting state, when the entrance to the operation winning opening corresponding to the data stored in the start opportunity storage area 203n is monitored and the entry to the monitored operation winning opening is detected, The start of jackpot is set (see S1113 and S1114 in FIG. 59). As a result, according to the jackpot type, it is possible to start the jackpot with the entrance to a different operation winning opening, so when the right trigger jackpot, it operates at the same timing as in the first embodiment While it is possible to realize the gameability aiming at the winning prize opening, it is possible to realize the gameability at which the big hit is started without aiming at the operating winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game play in the big hit waiting state.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the special symbol variation process 2 (S111) will be described with reference to FIG. This special symbol variation process 2 (S111) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22). This is a process for setting display on the symbol display device 37, setting a variation pattern of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

  Of the special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 57) in the second embodiment, in each processing of S201 to S23, each processing of S201 to S223 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process is executed.

  In the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 57) in the second embodiment, when the process of S220 is completed, the storage valve 675a is set to be opened (S231). By opening the storage valve 675a, when a game ball is stored in the storage device 675, the game ball can be inserted into the left operation winning opening 662 immediately after the start of the big hit standby state. Thereby, when it becomes a left opportunity big hit, it is possible to start the big hit soon before the game ball reaches the upper surface of the open door 65f1.

  When the process of S231 is completed, the data stored in the start opportunity storage area 203n is updated to data corresponding to the current jackpot type (S232), and the process proceeds to S223. In the process of S232, if the current jackpot is a right trigger jackpot (any of jackpots A2, B2, D2, F2 to H2), “01H” is stored as data, and the left trigger jackpot (the jackpot C2, E2 In any case, “02H” is stored as data.

  Next, the start-up process 2 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The start-up process 2 is a process executed in place of the start-up process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, and is a process that is activated when the power is turned on.

  Of the startup process 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment, the processes in S901 to S914 are the same as the processes in S901 to S914 in the startup process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed.

  Further, in the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment, when the process of S911 ends, it is next determined whether either the ball waiting flag 203j or the big hit flag 203m is on ( S921), when it is determined that any of the flags is on (S921: Yes), it means that the storage state of the storage device 675 is to be released (during the jackpot standby state or during the jackpot) Therefore, the opening of the storage valve 675a is set (S922), and the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, in the process of S921, when it is determined that both the ball waiting flag 203j and the big hit flag 203m are off (S921: No), the period during which the storage device 675 should be set in the storage state Since it means that the game is in a normal game, the storage valve 675a is closed (S923), and the process proceeds to S912.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the jackpot start process 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment will be described. The jackpot start process 2 (S1021) is a process executed in place of the jackpot start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 30), and the operation corresponding to the jackpot type This is a process for monitoring the winning entry to the winning opening (right operating winning opening 661 or left operating winning opening 662) and starting a big hit when a winning entry to the operating winning opening is detected.

  Of the jackpot start process 2 (see FIG. 59) in the second embodiment, the processes of S1101, S1103, and S1104 are S1101, S1103, and S1104 of the jackpot start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the above processing is executed.

  Further, in the jackpot start process 2 (see FIG. 59) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1101 that the ball waiting flag 203j is on (that is, the jackpot standby state) (S1101: Yes). Next, the data in the start opportunity storage area 203n is read (S1111), and it is determined whether the read data is data indicating the right action winning opening 661 (ie, “01H”) (S1112). If it is determined in the process of S1112 that the data corresponding to the right operation winning opening 661 (ie, “01H”) is stored (S1112: Yes), then the ball entering the right operation winning opening 661 is detected. (S1113: No), in order to continue the jackpot waiting state, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1113 that a ball entering the right operation winning opening 661 has been detected (S1113: Yes), the process proceeds to S1103 in order to end the jackpot standby state and start the jackpot. To do.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1112 that the data stored in the start opportunity storage area 203n is data indicating the left operation winning opening 662 (ie, “02H”) (S1112: No). Then, it is determined whether or not a ball entering the left working winning port 662 has been detected (S1114). If a ball entering the left working winning port 662 has not been detected (S1114: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1114, when it is determined that the ball entering the left operation winning opening 662 is detected (S1114: Yes), the process proceeds to S1103 in order to end the jackpot standby state and start the jackpot. To do.

  By executing this jackpot start processing 2 (see FIG. 59), the type of the winning winning opening that becomes a jackpot trigger is switched according to the jackpot type (whether it is a right trigger jackpot or a left trigger jackpot) Can do. Therefore, when the right opportunity jackpot is reached, the gameability in which the profit (the number of winning balls) that the player can enjoy in one round of the jackpot varies depending on the timing of aiming at the right action winning port 661, and in the jackpot waiting state The game method can be switched to a game property that does not affect profits (number of winning balls).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the jackpot control process 2 (S1022) in the second embodiment will be described. The jackpot control process 2 (S1022) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 30), and the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32). ) Is a process for executing the jackpot effect and opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

  Of the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, the processes of S1201 to S1217 are the same as the processes of S1201 to S1217 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed. Moreover, in the jackpot control process 2 (refer FIG. 60) in this 2nd Embodiment, after the process of S1214 or S1215 is complete | finished, the closure of the storage valve 675a of the storage apparatus 675 is set (S1221), and a process is carried out. The process proceeds to S1216. Thereby, the period for which the storage state of the storage device 675 is released can be limited to the jackpot standby state and the jackpot.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Second Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 61, the hit relation process 2 (S4321) in this 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. This hit-related process 2 (S4321) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Like the hit-related process (see FIG. 37), a command related to the win It is a process for performing the control corresponding to the type.

  Of the hit-related processes in the second embodiment (see FIG. 61), the processes of S4401 and S4404-S4410 are the processes of S4401 and S4404-S4410 in the hit-related processes (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing is executed. In the hit association process 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4401 that the command received from the main control device 110 includes a standby state command (S4401: Yes), A standby state command process for determining the content of the standby state effect is executed according to the received standby state command (S4421), and this process is terminated. Details of the standby state command processing (S4421) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the standby state command processing (S4421). In the standby state command processing (S4421), first, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a right trigger jackpot (S4601), and if it is determined that the current jackpot is a right trigger jackpot (S4601: Yes), Similarly, a display standby state command for executing the standby state effect (see FIG. 7) is set (S4602), the standby state effect flag 223g is set to ON (S4603), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4601 that the current jackpot is not the right trigger jackpot (the left trigger jackpot) (S4601: No), instead of executing the standby state effect, the display is confirmed in the variable display effect. A display standby state command is set for executing a standby state effect in such a manner that the third symbol is continuously displayed as it is (prolonged display is extended) (S4604), and this process ends. In the case of a left trigger jackpot, the standby state effect of simply extending the fixed display of the third symbol is that the jackpot standby state in the case of the left trigger jackpot is extremely short (about 0.5 seconds) This is because the jackpot is started at the end. Therefore, if the standby state effect (see FIG. 7) is executed in the same way as the right opportunity big hit when the left opportunity big hit, the standby state effect is displayed for a moment (about 0.5 seconds). Since the jackpot is started, there is a possibility that the player may feel a sense of discomfort in the displayed content or confuse the player. Therefore, in the second embodiment, in the jackpot standby state set based on the fact that the left opportunity jackpot has been set, the jackpot is started for the display mode (the fixed display of the third symbol) at the end of the variable display effect. The display continues to be displayed as it is. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel as if the big hit has just started after the end of the variable display, which can cause the player to feel uncomfortable or confuse the player This can be prevented (suppressed).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, two types of operation winning holes are provided on the upper right side and the lower left side of the game board 13, and the jackpot start opportunity according to the jackpot type. It is set as the structure which becomes the operation | movement prize opening which becomes. The right action winning opening 661 provided on the upper right side of the game board 13 is provided at a position where the game ball can be entered when the game ball is fired by right-handing, and is provided on the lower left side of the game board 13. The left operation winning opening 662 is provided at a position where a game ball can be entered when the game ball is fired by left-handing. In addition, a storage device 675 capable of storing only one game ball is disposed above the left operation winning opening 662, and a game state in which a left-handed game is performed (a low probability state of a special symbol, and In the normal state of the normal symbol), when the player plays a game aiming at the first entrance 64 and launches the game ball, the storage device 675 is almost filled up until the big hit of the first special symbol. On the other hand, the game ball is configured to be stored. Since the storage state of the storage device 675 is released when the jackpot standby state is reached, it becomes a jackpot type (left trigger jackpot) that is started when the player enters the left operation winning opening 662. In this case, the game ball stored in the storage device 675 flows downward and enters the left operation winning opening 662, so that the big hit is started immediately after the big hit standby state. Thereby, in the first round of jackpot, there is a high possibility that the jackpot will start in the state where the game ball has not reached the upper surface of the door 65f1, so regardless of the skill of the player, The number of prize balls obtained is almost the same every time. On the other hand, when the right opportunity big hit, the big hit is not started unless the game ball is launched aiming at the right action winning opening 661, so that the game ball enters the right action winning opening 661 as in the first embodiment. According to the timing to be played, it is possible to realize a gameability that can vary the number of prize balls obtained by the player in the first round of jackpot. Therefore, in this second embodiment, depending on whether it becomes a left trigger jackpot or a right trigger jackpot, the jackpot standby state and the gameability in the first round of jackpot can be made different, so depending on the jackpot type A game can be played with attention.

  In the second embodiment, the winning winning opening that triggers the start of the jackpot is made different according to the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in all jackpot types, the jackpot type is configured so that the jackpot is started when a game ball enters the left or right operation winning opening, and the jackpot type in which the storage valve 675a is opened is not opened. It is good also as a structure which provides a jackpot type. That is, in the case of the left trigger jackpot, the storage valve 675a is opened from the start of the jackpot standby state until the jackpot ends, whereas in the case of the right trigger jackpot, the jackpot standby state is started. The storage valve 675a may remain closed until the jackpot ends. By configuring in this way, in the case of the left trigger jackpot, immediately after the jackpot is confirmed and displayed, the game ball that has been stored by releasing the storage valve 675a enters the left operation winning opening 662 (winning) Therefore, as in the second embodiment described above, the big hit can be started soon after the game balls are stored on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 (in about 0.5 seconds after the big hit standby state). On the other hand, when the right opportunity big hit, the storage valve 675a is not opened, so even if the big hit is confirmed and displayed, the possibility that the game ball immediately enters the left operation winning opening 662 is reduced. Therefore, since the possibility that the jackpot will be started immediately after the confirmation display of the jackpot is reduced, the launch speed (launch strength) of the game ball is made different as in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above. Thus, when the number of game balls reaches the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 (is on the board) and enters the right operation winning port 661, the number of winnings (that is, the end condition of the first round) It is possible to provide epoch-making game play that allows more than two game balls to win the right specific winning opening 65a. Thus, as in the second embodiment, according to the jackpot type, the game performance in which the first round ends with a predetermined number of winnings, and the number exceeding the predetermined winning number depending on the skill of the player. Since it is possible to switch the gameability that allows a game ball to be won, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the second embodiment, two operation winning ports (right operation winning port 661 and left operation winning port 662) are provided, and the operation winning port serving as a jackpot start timing is changed according to the jackpot type. . In other words, after the combination of the third symbol indicating the jackpot (that is, the open eye) is confirmed and displayed, the game ball enters the left action winning port 662 where the game ball is likely to enter immediately (winning). After the combination of the jackpot type that is started and the third symbol indicating the jackpot is confirmed and displayed, the game ball is placed in the right action winning opening 661 that is unlikely to enter the game ball if the player does not aim. The jackpot type started by entering the ball (winning) was provided. On the other hand, only the right operation winning opening 661 is provided, and even if a game ball does not enter (wins) the right operation winning opening 661 (that is, the combination of the third symbol indicating the big hit is confirmed and displayed). It is also possible to provide a jackpot type that is started) and a jackpot type that does not start if the game ball does not enter (wins) in the right operation winning opening 661. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to provide the left operation winning port 662 and the storage device 670, so that the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the second embodiment, the ease of entering a game ball into the first entrance 64 is constant regardless of the state of the storage device 675, but it is easy to enter the first entrance 64. It is good also as a structure which is variable according to the state (whether or not the game ball is stored) of the storage device 675. Specifically, for example, the storage device 675 is provided on the upper left side of the first entrance 64, and when a game ball is stored in the storage device 675, the stored game ball The height of the storage device 675 is set so that the upper surface partially protrudes from the upper surface of the storage device 675. And when the game ball launched by the left strike collides with the game ball stored in the storage device 675, it is easily repelled in the direction in which the first entrance 64 is arranged. The position of the storage device 675 is set. With this configuration, when a game ball is stored in the storage device 675, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the first entrance 64, so that the first special symbol lottery is easily performed. Become. That is, since it is advantageous for the player to store the game ball in the storage device 675, the player can actively store the game ball at normal times. Therefore, since it is possible to start the big hit standby state with the game ball stored in the storage device 675 more reliably, when the left trigger big hit, the game ball stored in the storage device 675 is immediately The left action winning opening 662 can be entered to start the left opportunity jackpot.

  In the second embodiment, by switching the operation winning opening that becomes the trigger for jackpot according to the jackpot type, the period from when the jackpot standby state until the jackpot is started is different, It is not limited to. For example, the operation winning prize port itself may be deleted (that is, the jackpot is started without going through the jackpot waiting state), and the opening period may be simply changed according to the jackpot type. By configuring in this way, a big hit with a long opening can make more game balls reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 by making a right hit during the opening, whereas a big hit with a short opening period. Since it becomes difficult for the game ball to reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1, the advantage of the first round can be varied according to the jackpot type without using the operation winning opening.

  In this 2nd Embodiment, although it was set as the structure which switches the operation | movement prize winning opening used as a jackpot start opportunity according to jackpot classification, it is not restricted to this. For example, in the jackpot standby state, the jackpot may be configured to start regardless of which game winning ball is entered into the operation winning prize opening. And it is good also as a structure which changes the advantageous degree of jackpot according to the classification of the operation | movement winning opening which won the prize. More specifically, for example, it is more likely that the number of rounds per jackpot will be greater when the jackpot is started after winning the right action winning opening 661 than when the jackpot is started after winning the left action winning opening 662. It is good also as composition which becomes. With this configuration, if the game ball can be immediately won (entered) to the right-actuated winning port 661 when the jackpot is in a standby state, it is advantageous for the player. Whether or not the game ball is predicted from the execution of the variable display, the game ball immediately after the jackpot standby state is reached (for about 0.5 seconds until the game ball wins the left operation winning opening 662) A game can be played by devising to enter the right operation winning opening 661. Further, in this case, instead of switching the degree of advantage in accordance with the type of the operation winning opening, it is possible to switch the gameability. Specifically, for example, when a big hit is started after entering the left working winning opening 662, the winning arrangement of 10 rounds is always started, while the right working winning opening 661 is entered. When the big hit is started with the ball, either 4 rounds or 16 rounds of big hit may be selected by lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch between a gameability in which a jackpot of 10 rounds is stably given and an unstable (high gambling) gameability that can be a large number of rounds or a small number of rounds. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the second embodiment, after winning a big win in the special symbol lottery, the jackpot is started when the game ball enters the operation winning opening corresponding to the jackpot type. However, the present invention is limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, a winning ball that is not included in the configuration, and that immediately starts when a special symbol lottery is won (so-called one type), and a game ball is placed in a specific area provided on the game board 13. The right variable prize winning device 65 of the present embodiment is applied to a pachinko machine 10 of a type that has a jackpot (so-called 2 types) that is started when entering a ball. However, the same operation can be realized. In other words, in the case of one type, a big hit will be started shortly before launching the game ball toward the right variable winning device 65, so it is not possible to aim for over winning, but a specific area can be entered If the player enters a certain state (a state where two types can be aimed), the game ball is first fired on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1, and then the game ball is aimed at a specific area, thereby intentionally winning an over prize. Can be generated.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 to 68, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when a special symbol lottery is won and a big hit waiting state is entered, the game ball passes through the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation winning opening 660. The more game balls in the game, the more advantageous to the player (the more the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round).

  On the other hand, in 3rd Embodiment, it was set as the structure which provides the scene which changes a player's advantageous degree according to the number of the game balls which pass the upper surface of the opening-and-closing door 65f1 except when it is a big hit. More specifically, a lottery result (small win) is provided in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds) in part when the special symbol lottery is missed. . Accordingly, the more game balls passing through the upper surface of the door 65f1 at the timing when the small hit is started, the greater the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the small hit, so that the upper surface of the door 65f1 is A game can be played with attention.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main controller 110. In addition, the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. The process is partly changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 63, the board | substrate surface structure of the game board 13 in this 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 63, in the third embodiment, the normal entrance (through gate) 67 and the second entrance 640 are arranged in the flow path provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to do. This also allows the game ball to enter any of the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the first entrance 64, and the second entrance 640 by firing the game ball left-handed. Can be balled. For this reason, during the jackpot waiting state and during other than the jackpot, it is possible to cause the player to play the game left-handed regardless of the gaming state. When a big hit or a small hit is made, a game ball is fired onto the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by hitting the right side, so that a larger number of gaming balls can be given to the right specific winning opening 65a at a timing when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened. It is possible to entertain the amusement that is awarded to the player.

  In the third embodiment, the door 65f1 is opened in a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) when a part of the second special symbol is lost in the lottery, but the first special is opened. In the symbol lottery, the winning combination is not won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the degree of advantage while the normal symbol time-short state is set. Therefore, the interest of the player in the short time state of the normal symbol can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the display effect performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 3rd embodiment is demonstrated. First, FIG. 64 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of winning a lottery in the second special symbol in the probability variation state (the probability variation state of the special symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol). is there. In the present embodiment, in the case of a small hit, in the third symbol display device 81, combinations of the third symbols indicating the small hits (so-called chance eyes) are “3”, “4”, “1”. A combination of the third symbols with numbers is displayed. FIG. 64 (a) shows the moment when all symbols are stopped and displayed as a small hit.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (a), an image that prompts the player to strike left is displayed in the small area Ds3 until the combination of symbols corresponding to the small hit is confirmed and displayed in the probability variation state. Thereby, in the probability variation state, it is possible to make a left strike aiming at the second entrance 640 provided on the left side of the game board 13.

  FIG. 64B is a diagram showing a display mode during the small hit fixed display. During the small winning confirmation display, a balloon is displayed on the small area Ds3 in the 3rd symbol display device 81 with the characters "It's from the right!" And the arrow pointing right. By making a right turn according to this display content, the game ball can reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. Therefore, when the small hit opening period is started, the game ball arranged on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 can be made to enter the right specific winning opening 65a. The small hit confirmation display (see FIG. 64B) continues to be displayed after the fluctuation display period corresponding to the small hit has elapsed until the small hit ends. Hereinafter, for simplification of description, an image (see FIG. 64 (b)) that prompts a right strike and is displayed during a small hit is referred to as a “right strike notification image”.

  The small hits in the third embodiment are configured such that an opening period of 4 seconds is set. That is, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) after 4 seconds have elapsed since the right-hand notification image (see FIG. 64B) is displayed on the display screen. Yes. As a result, a larger number of game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the opening period of 4 seconds, so that a small hitting opening period occurs, and when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, more game balls are The player can enter the right specific winning opening 65a.

  Further, as described above, the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 is configured such that a game ball can pass in about 4 seconds. That is, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 rolls on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 for a period substantially the same as the opening period of the small hit. Therefore, when right-handed is started after the right-handed notification image (see FIG. 64B) is displayed, the game ball passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 before the opening period elapses. Can be suppressed. In addition, the more the game ball can reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1, the sooner the right hit of the game ball is started after the small hit is confirmed, the probability variation state (the probability variation state of the special symbol) In the normal symbol time-short state) and in the short-time state (special symbol low-probability state and normal symbol time-short state), it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the display content of the third symbol display device 81. it can.

<Electric Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the ROM 202 of the third embodiment is only partially changed in the specified contents of the first random number table 202a with respect to the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above. This is the same as the first embodiment described above. Therefore, as the description of the ROM 202 in the third embodiment, only the details of the first random number table 202a will be described.

  FIG. 65A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first per-random number table 202a in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the first random number table 202a according to the third embodiment, in addition to the random value (counter value) determined to be a big hit, the random value (counter value) determined to be a small hit. ) Is prescribed.

  More specifically, regardless of whether the special symbol is in a low probability state or a special symbol in a high probability state, the value of the first random number counter C1 is “360” for the lottery of the second special symbol. The small hits are defined in association with the range of “˜399” (see 202a2 and 202a4 in FIG. 65A). On the other hand, no value of the first per-random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is associated with the lottery of the first special symbol (see 202a2 and 202a4 in FIG. 65A). For this reason, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, there is no possibility of winning a small hit, but when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit with a probability of 1/10 (40/400) It becomes. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the short time state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol becomes high, so that the game ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, and the winning ball becomes a small hit with a relatively high probability. Since a chance to win is obtained, the gaming state becomes extremely advantageous for the player. Further, when a small win is made, it is possible to make a large difference in the player's degree of advantage depending on whether or not the game is played aiming at the specific winning opening 65a. That is, in the present embodiment, after the small hit is notified, a large amount (around 6 pieces) of the game balls reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 by hitting the game balls to the right during the opening period of 4 seconds. be able to. In other words, at the time when the small hitting opening period is started, about six game balls can be in a state of passing through the upper surface of the door 65f1. Every time one game ball wins a specific winning opening 65a, 10 winning balls are awarded, so that a right-hand strike is made according to the right-hand notification (see FIG. 64B) displayed in the small area Ds3. By doing so, it is possible to obtain around 60 prize balls for every small hit. Therefore, when a small hit is made, it is possible to greatly vary the degree of advantage between the probability variation state and the short-time state depending on whether or not right-handing is performed according to the display content (right-handed notification image) of the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, it is possible to play a game paying attention to the display contents of the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65B, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 65B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 in the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 13) in that a small hitting / medium flag 203p is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The small hitting / measuring flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not the small hitting is being performed. On the other hand, if it is off, it means that it is not in a small hit. Here, “meeting small hits” indicates a period from the start of the small hitting opening period to the end of the small hitting ending period. The small hitting medium flag 203p is set to ON at the start of the small hitting opening period (see S1303 in FIG. 67) and set to OFF at the end of the small hitting (see S1311 in FIG. 67).

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Third Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. First, the main process 3 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This main process 3 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, and is a process for performing main control of the game, similarly to the main process (see FIG. 30). is there.

  Of the main process 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment, the processes of S1001 to S1005 and S1006 to S1016 are respectively S1001 to S1005 and S1006 of the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment. The same process as each process of S1016 is executed. Further, in the main process 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment, when the process of S1005 is completed, a small hit control process for controlling the opening / closing operation of the specific winning port 65a during the small hitting is executed next. Is executed (S1021), and the process proceeds to S1006. Details of the small hitting control process (S1021) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the small hitting control process (S1021). In this small hit control process (S1021), first, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit start timing (S1301). In the process of S1301, the variation pattern is executed based on the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol is determined to be a small hit in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), and the variation pattern corresponding to the small bonus is ended. When it is time, it is determined that it is a small hit start timing.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1301 that it is the start timing of the small hit (S1301: Yes), a small hitting opening command indicating the start of the small hitting opening period is set (S1302), and the small hitting medium flag 203p is set. It is set to ON (S1303), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1301 that it is not the start timing of the small hit (S1301: No), then it is determined whether the small hitting medium flag 203p is on (that is, whether the small hitting is in progress) (S1304) When it is determined that the small hitting / medium flag 203p is off (S1304: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hitting flag 203p is on (S1304: Yes), it is next determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the right specific winning opening 65a (S1305). That is, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the opening period (3 seconds).

  In the process of S1305, when it is determined that it is the opening timing of the right specific winning opening 65a (S1305: Yes), the opening of the right specific winning opening 65a is set (S1306), and this process ends. By opening the right specific winning opening 65a by the processing of S1306, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, and the game ball passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 wins (enters) the right specific winning opening 65a. . As a result, the more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the more prize balls can be obtained by the player. Therefore, more player balls can be fired by the player during the small hitting opening period, and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the processing of S1305, if it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the right specific winning opening 65a (that is, not the opening timing of the opening period) (S1305: No), then the closing condition of the right specific winning opening 65a is established. Whether or not (S1307). In the third embodiment, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied when 0.2 seconds elapses after the right specific winning opening 65a is opened or when two game balls are won.

  In the process of S1307, when it is determined that the closing condition for the right specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1307: Yes), the right specific winning opening 65a is closed (S1308), indicating the start of the small hitting ending period. A small hitting ending command is set (S1309), and this process ends. The small hitting ending period is set to a period (for example, 0.5 seconds) sufficient to discharge all game balls that have entered the right specific winning opening 65a.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1307, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the closing condition for the right specific winning opening 65a is established (S1307: No), is it the end timing of the small hit (that is, the end timing of the ending period)? (S1310), and when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (S1310: Yes), the end of the small hit is set by turning off the small hit middle flag 203p (S1311 ), This process is terminated. Further, in the process of S1310, when it is determined that it is not the small hitting end timing (S1310: No), this process is ended as it is.

  By executing this small hitting control process (see FIG. 66), it is possible to realize the opening / closing operation of the same right specific winning opening 65a in every small hitting.

<Regarding Control Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device in Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the hit-related process 3 (S4331) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. The hit related process 3 (S4331) in the third embodiment is a process executed in place of the hit related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment in the command determination process (see FIG. 36). Similar to the winning-related process (see FIG. 37), this is a process for executing control corresponding to the type of command related to the winning.

  Of the winning association process 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, the processes of S4401 to S4410 are the same as the respective processes of S4401 to S4410 of the winning association process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Processing is executed.

  In the hit association process 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4409 that an ending command has not been received (S4409: No), then from the main controller 110 It is determined whether or not a small hitting opening command has been received (S4431). If it is determined that a small hitting opening command has been received (S4431: Yes), a right-hand notification image (see FIG. 64B) is displayed. A display command is set for the display control device 114 (S4432), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4431, when it is determined that the small hitting opening command has not been received (S4431: No), it is then determined whether the small hitting ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4433). ) When it is determined that the small hitting ending command has been received (S4433: Yes), a display for canceling the right-handed notification image and returning to a normal left-handed notification image (see FIG. 64A). Command is set (S4434), and this process is terminated. The right specific winning opening 65a is closed by releasing the right-handed notification image at the start of the small hitting ending period instead of the small hitting end timing, and the game ball can enter the right specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from continuing to show the game ball by hitting it to the right in spite of having no sex. Therefore, it can be prevented that the player loses. In contrast, if it is determined in S4433 that the small hitting ending command has not been received (S4433: No), this process ends.

  By the processing of S4431 to S4434 in the hit-related processing 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, display of the right-handed notification image is set from the start of the small hit opening period to the end of the small hit. can do. Therefore, since the player can make a right strike before the small hit release period is started (during the opening period of 4 seconds), by making a right strike according to the right strike notification image, A plurality of game balls can reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 at the start of the winning opening period. Therefore, even though the small hit release period itself is short (maximum 0.2 seconds), a plurality of game balls can be entered into the specific winning opening 65a, so that the game is performed according to the right-handed notification image. In this case, the degree of advantage can be increased. Thereby, since the player can more seriously confirm the display content of the third symbol display device 81, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a lottery result in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened only for a maximum of 0.2 seconds in a part of the case where the special symbol is not selected. ). When this small hit is reached, after the opening period of 4 seconds is set, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened for 0.2 seconds. Therefore, by continuously firing the game balls toward the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 during the opening period of 4 seconds, a plurality of game balls are passing the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 at the start of the open period. Therefore, it is possible to enter the plurality of game balls into the opened right specific winning opening 65a. In addition, when a special symbol lottery is won, a right-handed notification image is displayed from the start of the small hitting opening period to the end of the opening period. By configuring in this way, a plurality of game balls can be easily set to 0. 0 with each small hit by performing a right strike only while the right strike notification image is displayed according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to win the right specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of 2 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to play a game paying attention to the display contents of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the right strike is advantageous only in the case of a big hit or a small hit, and the game is played by left strike in normal times. With this configuration, it is possible to frequently switch between right-handed and left-handed during the short-time state or the probability-changing state, so that the player can enjoy switching the direction in which the game ball is fired. You can make it. In addition, if a right strike is notified, it is a chance that a winning ball can be obtained. Therefore, a player can be pleased when a right strike is notified.

  In the third embodiment, the effect of notifying the right-handed strike is executed when the small hit is normal, and the effect of notifying the left-handed strike is executed otherwise. However, the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, when a small hit is made, the open period is set immediately (for example, 0.1 seconds after the end of the fluctuation). That is, it is configured such that it is difficult to enter the game ball during the small hit release period unless right-handing is started during execution of the variable display. And it is good also as a structure which performs the production | presentation which suggests the expectation degree which becomes a small hit during the fluctuation display of the 2nd special symbol. Specifically, for example, during the execution of the variable display of the third symbol, the characters “10%”, “30%”, and “60%” are displayed on the small area Ds3. , Any one of the characters “100%” may be selected and displayed. When selecting, it is good also as a structure which determines the character displayed with the selection probability according to the lottery result of the 2nd special symbol. More specifically, the character “100%” is selected only in the case of small hits, but is configured such that the probability of selection is lower than that of other characters. In addition, the character “10%” is less likely to be selected than “30%” or “60%” when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and is most easily selected when the lottery is off. Configure as follows. The character “30%” is configured such that the probability of being selected in the case of a small hit is higher than “10%” and lower than “60%”, but is selected when it is out of place. The probability of being made is lower than “10%” and higher than “60%”. Further, the character “60%” is configured such that the probability of being selected in the case of a small hit is higher than “30%”, while the probability of being selected in the case of being off is more than “30%”. Configure to be lower. By configuring in this way, many of the characters that are displayed in the case of a small hit are “30%” and “60%” that can be displayed even in the case of losing, so from the displayed characters, It is possible to make the player predict whether or not to win the game. Then, the player who is predicted to be a small hit can launch a game ball toward the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 by right-handing while the variable display is being executed (before the small hit is started). As a result, if the hit is as predicted by the player, the open / close door 65f1 is opened and a winning ball can be obtained. It is possible to make the player more seriously predict whether or not it is a small hit. Further, when the character “100%” is displayed, it is always a small hit, so that the player can feel right-handed while the variable display is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the probabilistic state and the short-time state.

In the third embodiment, as the small hit type, only a small hit with an opening period of 4 seconds is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of types having different opening periods may be provided. Specifically, for example, an opening period may be provided with a type of 1 second, a type of 2 seconds, a type of 4 seconds, and a type of 8 seconds. By configuring in this way, if the opening period is short (1 second or 2 seconds), it is a small hit when a right hit is made after the opening period of the small hit is started. Since the number of game balls that reach the open / close door 65f1 is reduced before the opening period starts, the number of prize balls tends to be smaller than that of the small hit type with an opening period of 4 seconds. On the other hand, when the opening period is a small hit of a type (8 seconds) longer than the period required for the game ball to pass through the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1, the right after the opening period of the small hit is started If hitting is continued, the game ball fired in the first half of the opening period passes through the open / close door 65f1 before the start of the opening period. Therefore, since it becomes easy to generate | occur | produce a useless ball | bowl, it will become easy to reduce a held ball | bowl rather than the small hit type whose opening period is 4 second. As a result, the player's degree of advantage varies depending on the type of small hit, so when the small hit is notified (right-hand notification image is displayed), the player makes a right strike while hoping for an advantageous small hit. Can be done.

  In the third embodiment, the right-handed notification image is displayed when the small hit is made, but the right-handed notification image is not limited to be displayed during the small hit. For example, the right-handed notification image may be diverted to a display during execution of the jackpot (for example, display of the opening period). By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to prepare separate effects for the big hit and the small hit, so the number of data in the display data table can be reduced.

  In the third embodiment, the second special symbol may be selected in the lottery of the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the lottery of the second special symbol, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, a winning combination with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/50) may be adopted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to obtain a certain number of balls in a low probability state of a special symbol that is most disadvantageous to the player, and in a normal state of a normal symbol, when a small hit is made The game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. Therefore, even if the most unfavorable state lasts for a long time (so-called hooking has occurred), the player can hardly get bored with the game. In this case, the ratio of displaying the right-handed notification image when the small hit is won (occurrence rate of right-handed navigation) may be varied according to the number of consecutive misses. In other words, the right-handed navigator is configured so that little right-handed navigation is generated even if it is a small hit until it loses a specific number of times without winning a big win in the first special symbol lottery. The occurrence rate may be a high probability (for example, 50%). Thereby, since it becomes difficult to reduce the number of balls when the specific number of times is exceeded, the game can be continued for a longer time. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the big winning is started when a game ball enters the operating winning opening 660. However, the operating winning opening 660 is deleted, Only when it becomes, it is good also as a structure which can generate | occur | produce an overwinning.

  In the third embodiment, the jackpot is started when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of this, or in addition to this, it is possible to have a configuration in which a big hit is started when a game ball enters a specific area inside the right variable winning device 65. In other words, during the opening period of the right specific winning opening 65a based on the winning of the small hit, by entering the game ball into the right specific winning opening 65a, the game ball enters the specific area and wins big May be configured to start. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the merit of entering the right specific winning opening 65a with a small hit, so that it is possible to play a game with attention depending on whether right-handed navigation occurs. . In this case, after the first special symbol lottery is configured to win a small hit, it may be configured to vary the rate of occurrence of right-handed navigation in the case of a small hit for each gaming state. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which the navigation occurrence rate is lowered in a low probability state of a normal symbol and the navigation occurrence rate is increased in a short time state of a normal symbol. By comprising in this way, the advantageous degree in the time-short state of a normal symbol can be raised more. Conversely, the navigation occurrence rate may be higher in the low probability state of the normal symbol. As a result, in addition to the big win in the special symbol lottery, there will be a chance to win a big hit by entering a specific area in the case of a small win, so there will be a situation where you will not win a big win for a long time Can be difficult. Therefore, the game can be continued for a longer time. Furthermore, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, when the number of misses in the special symbol lottery exceeds a specific number, it may be configured to increase the incidence of right-handed navigation in the case of a small hit. . By configuring in this way, when a specific number of times is exceeded, it is possible to form a situation where it is easier to win a big hit than before it is over (it is easier to enter a game ball in a specific area), so a special symbol for a long time It can be configured so that the situation where the deviation of the distance is continuous does not easily occur. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, a big hit is started by causing the game ball to enter the operation winning opening 660 while the game ball passes through the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1, and the open / close door 65f1. The game ball that is passing through the upper surface of the golf ball enters the right specific winning opening 65a. In other words, when the jackpot standby state is entered, the advantage level of the first round (the right specific winning slot 65a is set to the first round) according to the timing at which the jackpot is always started (the ball is entered into the operation winning slot 660). The number of game balls to be entered is configured to be variable.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the gameability in which the degree of advantage (the number of winning balls that can be obtained) in the first round varies according to the timing for starting the big hit, the timing for starting the big hit, and one round. The player can select game characteristics that are independent of the degree of eye advantage (the number of prize balls that can be acquired). More specifically, in the fourth embodiment, the right specific winning opening 65a of the right variable winning device 65 is opened or the left variable winning device is selected in the first round of the jackpot by selection of the player in the jackpot waiting state. It is configured to change whether the left specific winning opening 650a of 650 is opened. Thereby, since a player can select favorite game nature, the game nature according to the taste for every player can be provided.

  The point that the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, in each jackpot round The condition for determining that the specific winning opening 650a is to be closed is that "30 seconds have passed or four or more game balls have been won", and the configuration of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 has been partially changed. The control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, In addition, the configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 69, the board surface structure of the game board 13 in this 4th Embodiment is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 69, in the fourth embodiment, a sorting device 680 is disposed on the upper right side of the game board 13 in front view, instead of the operation winning opening 660 in the first embodiment. Inside the sorting device 680, there are provided two operation winning ports (right operating winning port 681 and left operating winning port 682) through which game balls can enter. As with the operation winning port 660 in the first embodiment, these two operation winning ports are determined to be valid for entering a game ball only during the big hit waiting state. When a game ball enters the right action winning opening 681 in the big hit waiting state, a big hit is started in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in one round of jackpot, and the game ball enters the left action winning opening 682. When the player has entered the ball, the jackpot is started in which the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in one round of jackpot.

  In addition, a distribution member for distributing a game ball that has entered the distribution device 680 to one of the operation winning ports above the two operation winning ports (right operation winning port 681, left operation winning port 682). 683 is provided. The sorting member 683 is configured to be rotatable about the shaft 683a as a rotation shaft, and is tilted to the right (see the solid line in FIG. 69) and tilted to the left according to the elapsed time (every 2 seconds). The position is alternately changed (see the broken line in FIG. 69). When the distribution member 683 is tilted to the right, the upper portion of the right operation winning port 681 is blocked by the distribution member 683 and the upper portion of the left operation winning port 682 is opened. For this reason, the game balls that have entered the sorting device 680 while the sorting member 683 is tilted to the right are inclined by the sorting member 683 from the upper right direction in the front view toward the lower left direction in the front view. Then, it flows down to the lower left direction and enters the left operation winning opening 682.

  When a game ball enters the left operating winning opening 682 in the big hit waiting state, a big hit is started in which the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in all the big hit rounds. Unlike the right variable winning device 65, the left variable winning device 650 holds the game ball at a position where the game ball can enter the left specific winning port 650a while the left specific winning port 650a is closed. It is configured so that it is impossible. Therefore, in the first round of jackpots, the number of game balls entering is not likely to vary, and it is possible to stably pay out almost the same number of prize balls each time. Therefore, a player who is not confident in a game that launches a game ball at the same timing can select a jackpot that opens the left specific winning opening 650a.

  As described above, when the game ball enters the left operation winning opening 682, 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of each round, or the game ball is 4 in the left specific winning opening 650a. The round ends when more than one ball is entered. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot (left opportunity jackpot) that started when the game ball entered the left operating winning opening 682, almost four gaming balls won the left specific winning slot 650a and the jackpot ended. To do.

  On the other hand, when the distribution member 683 is inclined to the left, the upper portion of the right operation winning port 681 is opened and the upper portion of the left operation winning port 682 is blocked by the distribution member 683. For this reason, the game ball that has entered the sorting device 680 while the sorting member 683 is tilted to the left is inclined by the sorting member 683 from the upper left direction in the front view toward the lower right direction in the front view. , And then flow down to the lower right and enter the right action winning opening 681. When a game ball enters the right operation winning opening 681, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in the first round of the big hit, and the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in the second and subsequent rounds. Jackpot) is started. The first round of the right opportunity jackpot ends when 30 seconds elapse after the right specific winning opening 65a is opened, or when two or more game balls enter the right specific winning opening 65a. However, as described above, the number of winning prizes to the right specific winning opening 65a is approximately 2 to 6 depending on the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 when the right specific winning opening 65a is opened. Move up and down in range. Therefore, when a game ball enters the right operation winning opening 681 in the big hit waiting state, the number of winning balls that can be acquired is variable according to the timing of the game.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot standby state is entered, the placement of the sorting member 683 is switched every 2 seconds. By entering the game ball at a timing at which it is possible to enter the operation winning opening corresponding to, it is possible to provide the gameability suitable for each player's taste.

  Between the right operation winning opening 681 and the left operation winning opening 682, when a game ball that has entered the distribution device 680 does not enter any operation winning port, the game ball is distributed to the distribution device. An out port is provided for discharging to the outside of 680. By providing this out port, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of problems such as clogging of balls inside the sorting device 680.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a display effect in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIGS. 70A and 70B are diagrams illustrating an example of a display mode during a standby state effect executed in the jackpot standby state according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 70 (a) shows a display mode while the sorting member 683 is tilted to the right side in the jackpot standby state.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (a), in the jackpot standby state in the fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a display area in which the characters “Big jackpot confirmed!” Are displayed on the upper part of the front view of the display screen. HR1 and the combination (final stop symbol) of the third symbol that is finally stopped (determined) in the variable display effect that was executed before the big hit standby state is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 70 (a), while the sorting member 683 is tilted to the right, the display area HR2 formed on the display screen is “reliable mode when hit now !?” And the characters “I can stably win prize balls!” And the direction in which the game balls that have entered the sorting device 680 flow down (the direction in which the left action winning opening 682 is arranged). The image shown is displayed. Further, unlike the first embodiment, the chance meter CM is not displayed, and the right side of the display screen is empty. With these display contents, when a game ball is launched toward the sorting device 680, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a high possibility that the ball will enter the left operation winning opening 682. In other words, regardless of the timing of entering the game ball into the left working winning opening 682, a big hit of gaming that can stably enter 5 game balls into the left specific winning opening 650a in the first round. Can be recognized when is started.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (b), while the sorting member 683 is tilted to the left side, as in the first embodiment, the letters “Big hit confirmed!” Are displayed at the top of the front view of the display screen. The displayed display area HR1 and the combination (final stop symbol) of the third symbol that is finally stopped (determined) in the variable display effect that was executed before the big hit standby state is displayed. In addition, a chance meter CM is displayed on the right side of the display screen, as in the first embodiment. And, for the display area HR2 formed on the display screen, the characters “unstable mode !?” and the characters “obtain a lot if you are lucky! If you are unlucky ...” And an image indicating the direction in which the game ball that has entered the sorting device 680 flows down (the direction in which the right action winning opening 681 is disposed) is displayed. With these display contents, when a game ball is launched toward the sorting device 680, the game ball can recognize that there is a high possibility of entering the right operation winning opening 681. That is, the number of game balls reaching the opening / closing door 65f1 is determined from the number of gauges of the chance meter CM, and the game balls are inserted into the right operation winning opening 681 with good timing (when the number of gauges is larger). Thus, it can be recognized that a jackpot of playability that can acquire more prize balls is started.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, in the jackpot standby state, when the game ball is launched aiming at the sorting device 680, the type of the operation winning opening to be entered and the outline of the jackpot started by the game (game) Is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to select a jackpot of gameability that suits his / her preferences. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of switching the gaming property according to the preference of each player.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment is different from the above-described configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 13) in that a specific winning opening type storage area 203q, a distribution state storage area 203r, and a distribution state timer 203s. And is different in that it is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The specific prize slot type storage area 203q is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the specific prize slot opened in the first round of jackpot. Specifically, when “01H” is stored in the specific winning opening type storage area 203q, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in the first round of the jackpot, and the left specific winning opening 650a is set in the second and subsequent rounds. It means that it is a jackpot type to be released. On the other hand, when “02H” is stored, it means that the jackpot type is such that the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in each jackpot round. In this specific winning opening type storage area 203q, an initial value is set to “00H”, and “01H” is stored when a game ball enters the right operation winning opening 681 in the big hit waiting state, “02H” is stored when the game ball enters the left operation winning opening 682 (see S1131 and S1133 in FIG. 72). When the start condition for the first jackpot is established, the type of the specific winning opening to be opened is determined based on the data in the specific winning opening type storage area 203q (S1232 in FIG. 73).

  The distribution state storage area 203r is a storage area in which data indicating the direction of the distribution member 683 is stored. Specifically, when “00H” is stored in the distribution state storage area 203r, the distribution member 683 is tilted to the left (a state in which a game ball can enter the right operation winning opening 681). When “01H” is stored, the sorting member 683 is tilted to the right (a state in which a game ball can enter the left operation winning opening 682). Means. The data in the distribution state storage area 203r is updated to data corresponding to the changed arrangement every time the arrangement of the distribution member 683 is switched in the big hit waiting state (see S1125 and S1127 in FIG. 72). Note that the initial arrangement of the sorting member 683 is tilted to the left. In accordance with this, the initial value of the distribution state storage area 203r is also “00H”. In the big hit waiting state, every time the data in the distribution state storage area 203r is updated, a command (distribution state command) for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the arrangement of the distribution member 683 corresponding to the updated data. ) Is set. Based on this distribution state command, it is determined that the arrangement of the sorting member 683 has been switched, and the display state of the standby state effect is updated to a display form corresponding to the post-switching arrangement.

  The sorting state timer 203s is a timer for counting the remaining time until the state of the sorting member 683 is switched. The distribution state timer 203s is reset to “0” every time the state of the distribution member 683 is switched in the big hit standby state, and is set to 1 every time a big hit start process 4 (see FIG. 72) described later is executed. They are added one by one (S1121 in FIG. 72). That is, it is updated at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the main process. When the timer value becomes 500 or more, the state of the sorting member 683 is switched (see SS1124 and S1126 in FIG. 72).

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 72 and FIG. 73, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 72, the jackpot start process 4 (S1041) in the fourth embodiment will be described. This jackpot start process 4 (S1041) is a process executed in place of the jackpot start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and is an operation winning opening (right operating winning opening 681 and left operating winning opening 682). This is a process for starting the jackpot corresponding to the type of the operating winning opening when the entering into the operating winning opening is detected and the entering into the operating winning opening is detected.

  Of the jackpot start process 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, the processes of S1101, S1103, and S1104 are S1101, S1103, and S1104 of the jackpot start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the above processing is executed.

  Further, in the jackpot start process 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1101 that the ball waiting flag 203j is on (that is, in a jackpot standby state) (S1101: Next, 1 is added to the value of the distribution state timer 203s (S1121), and it is determined whether the timer value after addition is 500 or more (S1122). In the process of S1122, when it is determined that the timer value of the distribution state timer 203s after addition is 500 or more (S1122: Yes), it means that it is time to switch the state of the distribution member 683. Each process of S1123 to S1129 for switching the state of the member 683 is executed.

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the distribution state storage area 203r is “00H” (whether the distribution member 683 is tilted to the left) (S1123). If it is determined in the processing of S1123 that “00H” is stored (S1123: Yes), the sorting member 683 tilted to the left is changed to tilted to the right (S1124), and the sorting state is set. “01H” is stored in the storage area 203r (S1125), and the process proceeds to S1128.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1123, when it is determined that the data stored in the distribution state storage area 203r is “01H” (S1123: No), the distribution member 683 tilted to the right is tilted to the left. The state is changed (S1126), "00H" is stored in the distribution state storage area 203r (S1127), and the process proceeds to S1128.

  In the process of S1128 executed after the process of S1125 or S1127, a distribution state command indicating the arrangement of the distribution member 683 after switching is set (S1128), and the value of the distribution state timer 203s is reset to 0 ( S1129), the process proceeds to S1130.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1122 that the value of the updated distribution state timer 203s is less than 500 (S1122: No), this means that it is not the timing to switch the state of the distribution member 683. Therefore, each process of S1123 to S1129 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1130. In the process of S1130, it is determined whether or not a winning ball to the right operation winning hole 681 has been detected (S1130). Then, “01H” which is data indicating the right specific winning opening 650a is stored (S1131), and the process proceeds to S1103. Accordingly, it is possible to set a jackpot start in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in the first round of jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1130, when it is determined that the ball entering the right operation winning opening 681 is not detected (S1130: No), it is then determined whether the ball entering the left operation winning opening 682 is detected. (S1132). If it is determined in the processing of S1132 that a ball entering the left working winning opening 682 has been detected (S1132: Yes), the data indicating the left specific winning opening 650a with respect to the specific winning opening type storage area 203q is “02H”. Is stored (S1133), and the process proceeds to S1103. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1132 that the ball entering the left operation winning opening 682 has not been detected (S1132: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the big hit waiting state, The process ends.

  In the jackpot start process 4 (S1041) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S1104 is completed, the distribution state timer 203s is then reset to 0 (S1134), and the process ends. In the processing of S1134, by resetting the distribution state timer 203s at the end of the jackpot standby state, the timer value can be updated from the state in which the distribution state timer 203s is reset in the next jackpot standby state. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the jackpot control process 4 (S1042) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 4 (S1042). The jackpot control process 4 (S1042) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, and the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32). ) Is a process for controlling the opening / closing operation of the right specific winning port 65a and the left specific winning port 650a.

  Of the jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 73) in the fourth embodiment, in each process of S1201 to S1205 and S1207 to S1217, S1201 to S1205 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, respectively. And the same process as each process of S1207-S1217 is performed. In the jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 73) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round in the process of S1205 (S1205: Yes), the currently started round is 1 round. Is determined (S1231).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1231 that the number of rounds is one (S1231: Yes), the opening of the specific winning slot corresponding to the data stored in the specific winning slot type storage area 203q is set (S1232). Is shifted to S1207. More specifically, if the data stored in the specific winning slot type storage area 203q is “01H”, the opening of the right specific winning slot 65a is set, while the stored data is “02H”. If there is, the opening of the left specific winning opening 650a is set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1231, when it is determined that the round to be started this time is not the first round (S1232: No), the opening of the left specific winning opening 650a is set (S1233), and the process proceeds to S1207. To do.

  By executing this jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 73), in the first round of jackpot, a specific winning opening corresponding to the type of the operating winning slot that the player has passed (selected) in the jackpot waiting state is opened. Can be made. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, it is possible to provide gameability according to the type of the operation winning opening selected by the player.

<Regarding Control Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the hit-related process 4 (S4341) in the fourth embodiment. This hit related process 4 (S4341) is a process executed in place of the hit related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and, like the hit related process (see FIG. 37), It is a process for performing the control corresponding to the type.

  Of the winning association process 4 (see FIG. 74) in the fourth embodiment, the processes of S4401 to S4410 are the same as the respective processes of S4401 to S4410 of the winning association process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Processing is executed. In the hit association process 4 (see FIG. 74) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4409 that the command received from the main control device 110 does not include an ending command (S4409: No) Next, it is determined whether or not a distribution state command is included (S4441).

  If it is determined in the process of S4441 that the distribution state command is included in the command received from the main controller 110 (S4441: Yes), it corresponds to the distribution state indicated by the received distribution state command. A display command for updating to the state of the standby state effect is set (S4442), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4441, when it is determined that the distribution state command is not included in the command received from the main control device 110 (S4441: No), this process is ended as it is.

  With this hit-related process 4 (see FIG. 74), each time the state of the sorting member 683 is switched, a display mode (see FIGS. 70A and 70B) corresponding to the state after switching can be set. Therefore, when the player is in the jackpot waiting state, the player simply confirms the display content of the third symbol display device 81, and the current state of the sorting device 680 becomes his own when the game ball is inserted. It is possible to easily determine whether or not a game jackpot matching the taste is started.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, two types of specific winning holes (the right specific winning hole 65a and the left specific winning hole 650a) that allow a game ball to enter when a big hit is obtained. It is set as the structure to provide. More specifically, while the right specific winning opening 65a is closed, the game ball is relatively long at a position where the right specific winning opening 65a is opened when the right specific winning opening 65a is opened (upper surface of the open / close door 65f1). While the left specific winning opening 650a is closed, the game ball is held at a position where the game ball can enter the left specific winning opening 650a while being closed. It is configured to be impossible to keep. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, two types of operation winning ports (right operating winning port 681 and left operating winning port 682) are provided as triggers for starting the jackpot, and the operating winning port for entering the ball in the jackpot waiting state is a game. Is configured to allow the user to select. If a game ball enters the right actuated winning opening 681, a right trigger jackpot that starts the right specific prize opening 65a is started in each round of the jackpot, and if a game ball enters the left actuating winning opening 682 The left opportunity jackpot is started when the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in each round of jackpot. Accordingly, the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 at the timing of entering the game ball into the right operation winning opening 681 greatly affects the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round. Thus, it is possible to allow the player to select a game where the situation in the jackpot waiting state does not affect the number of winning balls. Therefore, it is possible to provide the gameability according to the preference for each player.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the left opportunity jackpot is reached, it is impossible to allow the game ball to stay at a position where the player can enter the left specific winning port 650a in the jackpot waiting state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, up to a predetermined number (for example, one) of gaming balls may be allowed to stay at a position where it can enter the left specific winning opening 650a within a range smaller than the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. By configuring in this way, even when the player selects the left operation winning opening 682, it is possible to provide a game with the degree of advantage varying according to the timing of entering the game ball.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the right opportunity jackpot is reached, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in all rounds of the jackpot, while when the left opportunity jackpot is reached, the left specific winning slot 650a is set in all rounds. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a specific winning opening corresponding to the operating winning opening is opened only in the first round, and a common specific winning opening is opened in the second and subsequent rounds. Even if comprised in this way, the game property in the 1st round can be switched according to the classification of the operation | movement winning opening which the game ball entered.

  In the fourth embodiment, whether to start the right trigger jackpot or the left trigger jackpot is made different depending on the type of the action winning opening entered. In other words, the type of the specific winning opening to be opened in the jackpot is made different depending on the type of the operating winning opening, but it is not limited to this. For example, the number of jackpot rounds may be made different depending on the type of the operation winning opening. More specifically, for example, when a game ball enters the right operation winning opening 681, the number of rounds is 16 rounds, or the big hit of 4 rounds is drawn in half, whereas the left operation winning opening 682 When a game ball enters the ball, a jackpot of 10 rounds may be selected without fail. In addition, when a game ball enters a specific area during a big hit, in a gaming machine (so-called V-type machine) to which a probability change state is given after the big hit, depending on the type of the operation winning opening, It is good also as a structure in which a sphere rate is varied. More specifically, for example, when a game ball enters the right action winning opening 681, the winning rate to a specific area is drawn in half with a jackpot of 20% and a jackpot of 100%. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the left operation winning opening 682, it may be configured that a big hit with a ball entry rate of 60% in a specific area is always selected.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 79. In the first embodiment described above, the degree of advantage when the big hit is started (the number of winning balls that can be obtained in the first round) according to the number of game balls launched toward the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 in the big hit standby state. Was configured to be variable.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the variation display corresponding to the jackpot ends, the jackpot is started without going through the jackpot standby state. And by varying the jackpot opening period and interval period according to the jackpot type, the number of game balls that can reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 during the opening period and interval period is varied, and the jackpot type is different for each jackpot type. The advantage is variable.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the end of each round of jackpot The condition is unified to “when 30 seconds have passed or two or more game balls are won”, the configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the main controller The control process executed by the MPU 201 of 110 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 75, the board | substrate surface structure of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in 5th Embodiment is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 75, in the gaming board 13 in the fifth embodiment, the operation winning opening 660 provided on the upper right side in front view of the gaming board 13 (see FIG. 2) in the first embodiment is deleted. . Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, when the variation display corresponding to the jackpot ends, the jackpot opening period starts immediately (without going through the jackpot standby state).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 75, in the fifth embodiment, the left variable winning device 650a is deleted. For this reason, in this fifth embodiment, in all the big hit rounds, 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round, or the right specific winning opening that is closed when two or more game balls enter. 65a is opened.

<Electrical Configuration of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RM 202 in the first embodiment in that a period length selection table 202e is added, and the first type selection table. The difference is that the definition of 202b is partially changed. Since the other configuration is the same as that of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The period length selection table 202e is a data table that defines the jackpot opening period and interval period for each jackpot type. When the start timing of the jackpot opening period and the start timing of the interval period are reached, the period amount selection table 202e is referred to, and the opening period and the interval period corresponding to the jackpot type are set. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 70 (c). This period length selection table 202e includes two types of opening periods, a relatively long period (5 seconds) and a relatively short period (1 second). Is stipulated. Similarly, two types of interval periods are defined: a relatively long period (3 seconds) and a relatively short period (0.5 seconds). As a result, a jackpot with a long closing period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round, and a closing period (interval period) between each round after the second round, and a short jackpot are provided. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76B, the first hit type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 76B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 76 (b), in the first hit type selection table 202b according to the fifth embodiment, there are five types of jackpot types from “big hit A5” to “big hit E5” as the big hit types of the first special symbol. There are three types of jackpot types from “Big Jack F5” to “Big Jack H5” as the jackpot types of the second special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (b), as the jackpot of the first special symbol, “Big Jack A5” is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 4”. (See 202b1 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are five counter values that are “big hit A5”, so “big hit A5” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 5% (5/100). This “big jackpot A2” has eight rounds as in the “big jackpot A” in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, “special symbol probable state” and “ordinary symbol time-short state” are given. The jackpot type. The “big hit A5” is one type of big hit type in which a relatively long period is set as the opening period and the ending period. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, in all of the big hits, 30 seconds have elapsed, or two or more game balls have entered the right specific winning opening 65a so that the right specific winning opening 65a Is closed and the round ends. Therefore, if the opening period and the interval period are long, more game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the closing period, so that more game balls can be opened and closed at the start of the next round. It can be set as the state which has got on the door 65f1. That is, when a new round is started and the open / close door 65f1 is opened, more game balls can be dropped from the open / close door 65f1 and can enter the right specific winning opening 65a. This increases the possibility that the number of game balls exceeding the upper limit number of balls (2) specified in each round will enter the right specific winning port 65a (overwin), so that the player It becomes easy to become advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if the opening period and the interval period are short, it is difficult to allow the game ball to reach the upper surface of the door 65f1 during these closing periods. (2) gaming balls are likely to enter and the round is likely to end (the possibility of over winning is reduced). That is, it tends to be disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls. In the following description, a jackpot with a long opening period and a long interval period (a jackpot that tends to win a lot of prize balls in each round) will be referred to as a “long interval jackpot”. A jackpot with a short opening period and an interval period (each A jackpot that is difficult to get a lot of prize balls in a round is called “short-interval jackpot”.

  As a big hit of the first special symbol, a range of “5 to 14” of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit B5” (see 202b2 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that become “big hit B2”, so “big hit B5” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This “big jackpot B5” has five rounds like the “big jackpot B” in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, “special symbol probable state” and “ordinary symbol time-short state” are given. The jackpot type. Further, this “big hit B5” is a kind of long interval big hit like “big hit A5”. For this reason, it is easy to increase the number of prize balls acquired in each round as compared to the short interval jackpot.

  As a big hit of the first special symbol, a range of “15 to 64” of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit C5” (see 202b3 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 50 counter values that become “big hit C2”, so “big hit C5” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This “big jackpot C5” has five rounds in the same way as the “big jackpot B” in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, a “special symbol probable state” and a “normal symbol short-time state” are given. The jackpot type. The “big hit C5” is a kind of short hit big hit. For this reason, it is difficult for the number of prize balls to be obtained in each round to increase compared to the long interval jackpot.

  As a jackpot of the first special symbol, a range of “65-74” of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “Big Jack D5” (see 202b4 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that become “big hit D5”, so “big hit D5” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This “big jackpot D5” has five rounds like “big jackpot C” in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, “low probability state of special symbol” and “short time state of normal symbol” are granted Is a jackpot type. The “big hit D5” is a kind of long interval big hit. For this reason, it is easy to increase the number of prize balls acquired in each round as compared to the short interval jackpot.

  As a jackpot of the first special symbol, a “big jackpot E5” is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “75 to 99” (see 202b5 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 25 counter values that are “big hit E5”, so “big hit E5” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 25% (25/100). This “big jackpot E5” has five rounds in the same way as the “big jackpot C” in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, “low probability state of special symbol” and “short time state of normal symbol” are granted. Is a jackpot type. The “big hit E5” is a kind of short interval big hit. For this reason, it is difficult for the number of prize balls to be obtained in each round to increase compared to the long interval jackpot.

  Further, as a big hit of the second special symbol, a range of “0-4” of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit F5” (see 202b6 in FIG. 76). . Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are five counter values that are “big hit F5”, so “big hit F5” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 5% (5/100). This “big jackpot F5” has 16 rounds like the “big jackpot D” in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, a “special symbol probable state” and a “normal symbol short-time state” are given. The jackpot type. The “big hit F5” is a kind of long hit big hit. For this reason, it is easy to increase the number of prize balls acquired in each round as compared to the short interval jackpot.

  As a big hit of the second special symbol, a range of “5-64” of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit G5” (see 202b7 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 60 counter values that become “big hit G5”, so “big hit G5” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 60% (60/100). This “big jackpot G5” has 10 rounds in the same way as the “big jackpot E” in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, “probability of special symbols” and “short state of normal symbols” are given. The jackpot type. The “big hit G5” is a kind of long interval big hit. For this reason, it is easy to increase the number of prize balls acquired in each round as compared to the short interval jackpot.

  As a big hit of the second special symbol, a range of “65 to 99” of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit H5” (see 202b8 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 35 counter values that are “big hit H5”, so “big hit H5” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The proportion is 35% (35/100). This “big jackpot H5” has 10 rounds in the same way as the “big jackpot D” in the first embodiment, and after the jackpot ends, “low probability state of special symbol” and “short time state of normal symbol” are granted. Is a jackpot type. The “big hit H5” is a kind of long interval big hit. For this reason, it is easy to increase the number of prize balls acquired in each round as compared to the short interval jackpot.

  Thus, in the fifth embodiment, the long interval big hit and the short interval big hit are provided. In the long interval big hit, since the closing period of the right specific winning opening 65a between rounds becomes long, more game balls can reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 by the right stroke during the long closing period. Therefore, since the closing period ends and a new round is started, a game ball passing through the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 can be made to enter the right specific winning opening 65a. Can be earned. On the other hand, in the short interval jackpot, the period from when the right specific winning opening 65a is closed to when it is opened next is short, and it is almost the case that the game ball reaches the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 during the closing period. Since it is not possible, the possibility of over winning in the next round is also reduced. Therefore, the number of award balls that can be obtained in each round is likely to be smaller than that of long interval jackpots. Therefore, in this fifth embodiment, the degree of advantage for each jackpot can be varied by changing the possibility of winning an overscore separately for each jackpot type, apart from the number of rounds and the gaming state after the jackpot. A game can be played paying attention to the type.

  Next, details of the period length selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76C is a diagram showing the specified contents of the period length selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 76 (c), in this period length selection table 202e, the length of the period to be set as the opening period and the interval period is defined for each jackpot type.

  Specifically, for the jackpot type of “big hit A5”, “big hit B5”, “big hit D5”, “big hit F5” to “big hit H5” (long interval big hit), the opening period is “5 seconds”. In addition to being defined in association with each other, “3 seconds” is defined in association with the interval period (see 202e1 in FIG. 76C). In addition, for the jackpot type “big hit C5” and “big hit E5” (short interval big hit), the opening period is defined in association with “1 second” and the interval period is “0.5 seconds”. Are defined in association with each other (see 202e2 in FIG. 76C). By selecting the opening period and the interval period with reference to these provisions, each closing period (opening period, interval period) becomes relatively long in the long interval jackpot, so that the game ball is inserted during the closing period. Relatively many can reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. On the other hand, in the short interval big hit, each closing period is set to such a short length as to whether one game ball will reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 even if it is hit right after the closing period starts. Over-winning is unlikely to occur in each jackpot round. Therefore, by setting the closing period with reference to the period length selection table 202e, it is possible to vary the possibility of over winning depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to play a game paying attention to the jackpot type.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. First, with reference to FIG. 77, the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 5 (S121) in this 5th Embodiment is demonstrated. The special symbol variation process 5 (S121) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment. Similar to (see FIG. 22), this is a process for setting display on the first symbol display device 37, a variation pattern of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

  Of the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, in each process of S202 to S219 and S222 to S224, S202 to S202 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those in S219 and S222 to S224 are executed.

  Further, when the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment is started, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made (S241), and if a big hit is made (S241: Yes), The process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S241 that the game is not a big hit (S241: No), the process proceeds to S202.

  Further, in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S219 ends, the big hit start flag 203k is set to ON (S242), and the process proceeds to S224.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 78, the jackpot control process 5 (S1052) in this 5th Embodiment is demonstrated. This jackpot control process 5 (S1052) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, and opens and closes the right specific winning opening 65a. This is a process for controlling the operation.

  Of the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 78), in the processes of S1201, S1203 to S1209, and S1210 to S1217, S1201, S1203 to S1209 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, and The same processes as those in S1210 to S1217 are executed.

  In the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 78) in the fifth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1201 that the jackpot start flag 203k is on (S1201: Yes), the period length selection table 202e (FIG. 76). (See (c)) is read out (S1241), an opening period having a length corresponding to the current jackpot type is specified from the read period length selection table 202e, and an opening command indicating the specified period is set (S1242). . In the process of S1242, an opening command indicating an opening period of 5 seconds is set in the case of a big hit with a long interval, and an opening command indicating an opening period of 1 second is set in the case of a big hit with a short interval. When the process of S1242 ends, the process proceeds to S1203.

  In the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 78) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1208 that the closing condition for the right specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1208: Yes), the jackpot control process 5 An interval setting process for setting the interval period is executed (S1243), and this process ends. Details of the interval setting process (S1243) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the interval setting process (S1243). In this interval setting process (S1243), first, it is determined whether or not the closing condition established this time is closing accompanying the end of the final round (S1401), and when it is determined that the closing condition is related to the end of the final round (S1401). : Yes), since there is no need to set an interval period, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the closing condition associated with the end of the round other than the final round is satisfied (S1401: No), the period length selection table 202e is read (S1402), and this time corresponds to the jackpot type The interval period to be selected is selected (specified) from the read period length selection table 202e (S1403). Then, the start of the interval period having the length specified in the process of S1403 is set (S1404), and this process ends.

  By executing this interval setting process (see FIG. 79), the length of the interval period can be varied depending on whether the long interval jackpot or the short interval jackpot. Thereby, in the long interval big hit, a large amount of game balls can reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 being closed every interval period. Can win over. On the other hand, when a short hit is a big hit, an extremely short period (0.5 seconds) is set as the interval period, so that the game ball can reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 during the interval period. It becomes difficult. Therefore, it is difficult for over-winning to occur in each round, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round is reduced. Therefore, a game can be played in the expectation that long interval jackpot is selected as the jackpot type.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the jackpot opening period and the long interval jackpot with a relatively long interval period and the jackpot opening period and the short interval jackpot with a relatively short interval period are provided. It is configured. In the case of long interval jackpots, the closing period (opening period) from when the jackpot is announced until the first round is started, and the next round starts after the end of the first round In the closing period (interval period) until the end, a large amount of award balls can be made to reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 by making a right strike. Therefore, when the right specific winning opening 65a is opened after the closing period elapses, the game balls on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 can be made to enter the right specific winning opening 65a at a stretch. The rate at which over-winning occurs can be increased. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit with a short interval, even if the player hits the right during the closing period, the closing period is too short and the next round is started with almost no game ball reaching the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. . Therefore, over-winning is less likely to occur, which is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls than the long interval jackpot. As a result, in addition to the number of jackpot rounds and the gaming state after the jackpot, the likelihood of over winnings can be varied according to the jackpot type, so the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type is increased. be able to. Therefore, when it is a big hit, it is possible to play a game paying attention to the type of the big hit.

  In the fifth embodiment, only two types of long interval jackpots with long closing periods and short interval jackpots with all closing periods are short are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which provides more types. Specifically, for example, in addition to the long interval jackpot and short interval jackpot, a long interval (for example, 3 seconds) is set as a closing period until a predetermined round of the jackpot (for example, the third round), and subsequent rounds Is a jackpot type in which a short interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set, and conversely, a short interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set as a closing period until a predetermined round (for example, the third round). In the subsequent rounds, a jackpot type in which a long interval (for example, 3 seconds) is set may be provided. Further, for example, a configuration in which a jackpot type in which a short interval and a long interval are alternately repeated may be provided. By configuring in this way, even if the opening period is a short interval, it is possible to give a player that a big hit that becomes a long interval after a predetermined round has passed, or a big hit that repeats a short interval and a long interval alternately. It can be expected. Moreover, when the opening period is a long interval, it can be expected to be a big hit that sets a long interval for all closing periods. Thereby, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the jackpot type.

  In the fifth embodiment, when the long interval is a big hit, both the opening period and the interval period are long intervals, and when the short interval is a big hit, both the opening period and the interval period are short. This is because of the interval, but it is not limited to this. For example, one of the periods may have a common length, and only the length of the other period may vary according to the jackpot type. Thereby, since control can be simplified, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In the fifth embodiment, the lengths of the opening period and the interval period are made different according to the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of this, or in addition, at least one of the opening period and the interval period may be made different according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, for example, in a low probability state of a special symbol that is disadvantageous to the player, and in a normal state of a normal symbol, a short opening period (for example, 1 second) and an interval period (for example, 0.5 second) On the other hand, a long opening period (for example, 5 seconds) and an interval period (for example, 3 seconds) are set in the gaming state (probability change state, time-short state) in which the short time state of the normal symbol is set. It is good also as a structure which provides a jackpot type. Thereby, the probability variation state advantageous to the player and the advantage degree of the short time state can be further improved. Conversely, a long closing period may be set in a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, and a short closing period may be set in an advantageous gaming state. As a result, more winning balls can be obtained when the player wins in a state unfavorable to the player, so that the player can be prevented from quitting when the player is unfavorable. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Further, the control for changing the length of the closing period in accordance with the gaming state or the jackpot type is not necessarily combined with the right variable winning device 65 in the present embodiment. The present invention may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 provided with only a variable winning device (for example, the left variable winning device 650 in each of the above embodiments) having a structure in which an over winning can not be intentionally generated. As a result, the closing period can be varied according to the situation (a winning jackpot type, a gaming state at the time of winning), and the effect performed during the closing period can be varied. Therefore, the production mode can be diversified.

<Modification of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the above-described fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 80. In the above-described fifth embodiment, a single jackpot type that is easily over-winned using one variable winning device 65 and We explained the technology to provide a jackpot type that is difficult to win. On the other hand, in this modified example, a technique that uses two types of variable winning devices (a lower variable winning device 65 and an upper variable winning device 650) to vary the possibility that an over winning will occur without changing the closing period. explain.

  FIG. 80 is a view showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 80, in this modification, the variable winning device 65 under the same structure as the right variable winning device 65 in each of the above embodiments is arranged at the same position as the right variable winning device 65 in each of the above embodiments. Has been. Above the lower variable winning device 65, the variable winning device 650 having the same structure as the left variable winning device 650 in the first to fourth embodiments is disposed. In this modified example, depending on the jackpot type, the jackpot type (alternate jackpot) in which the upper specified winning port 650a of the upper variable winning device 650 and the lower specified winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 are alternately opened every round. ) And a jackpot type (one jackpot) in which the lower specific winning opening 65a is opened in each jackpot round is provided. Further, each closing period (opening period, interval period) is set to the same period as the short interval jackpot in the fifth embodiment described above. When configured in this manner, one big hit is the same operation as the short interval big hit in the fifth embodiment described above, so that almost no overwinning occurs, which is disadvantageous in terms of the number of winning balls.

  On the other hand, in the case of an alternate big win, if a right hand is made in a round in which the upper specific winning opening 650a is opened, a part of the game balls pass through the right side of the upper specific winning opening 650a (upper specific winning opening) In some cases, it may flow downward (without winning the opening 650a) and reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. That is, at the start of the next round (the round in which the lower specific winning opening 65a is opened), there is a possibility that one or more game balls are arranged on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. Thereby, the more game balls that have reached the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1, the higher the occurrence rate of over winning in the next round (the round in which the lower specific winning opening 65a is opened). Therefore, in the case of an alternate jackpot, the player is allowed to play the game by devising a launch strength that makes it easy to reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 through the right side of the upper specific winning opening 650a. Can do. In other words, during a maximum of 30 seconds when the upper specific winning opening 650a is opened, a larger number of game balls reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1, and then the upper specific winning opening 650a has an upper limit number (two) or more. A game can be played aiming at entering a ball. As a result, in the case of an alternate jackpot, the prize balls that can be obtained differ according to the player's playing method, so that players who are confident in technology can actively play games with the pachinko machine 10. Can be done. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 90. In the fifth embodiment described above, the length of the opening period and the ending period (the length of the closing period) are varied according to the jackpot type, thereby reaching the opening / closing door 65f1 of the right variable prize winning device 65 in each closing period. The number of game balls that can be played is different. As a result, the game ball passing through the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 at the start of each round (ie, when the right specific winning opening 65a is opened) is arranged at a position that is guided to the inside of the right specific winning opening 65a. The number of game balls) is configured to be different. In the long interval jackpot that sets the length of the closing period that allows more than two game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the game balls are continuously fired toward the opening / closing door 65f1 during the closing period. By simply continuing, all the game balls passing over the open / close door 65f1 at the start of the next round can be awarded to the opened right specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, in each jackpot round that ends when two or more game balls are won, it is possible to enter more than the prescribed number (two) of game balls by simply making a right-hand hit during the closing period. be able to. On the other hand, in a short interval big hit in which a closing period of a length that allows only two or less game balls to reach the upper face of the open / close door 65f1 is set, it passes through the upper face of the open / close door 65f1 at the start of each big hit round The number of game balls inside is almost 2 or less. As a result, in each jackpot round, only a specified number (2) of game balls enter and the round ends. As a result, the number of winning balls that can be obtained in each jackpot round can be varied according to the jackpot type, so that the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type can be further increased.

  In contrast, in the sixth embodiment, the length of the opening period is fixed to 0.5 seconds regardless of the jackpot type. That is, even if the player hits the right after the opening period starts, the opening period ends and the right specific winning opening 65a is opened before the game ball reaches the opening / closing door 65f1. Whether or not it is better to fire a game ball from the variable display based on the suggestion contents during the execution of the variable display effect (whether the open / close door 65f1 is opened with a plurality of game balls reaching the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1) Whether or not) is determined by the player. That is, it is configured to be able to execute an effect that informs the player of the possibility of being advantageous when a right-handed strike is made during execution of the variable display. This allows the player to predict whether it should be right-handed from the contents of the production, and if it is determined that right-handed is better, right before the end of the change You can start hitting. Therefore, when the open / close door 65f1 is opened as expected, it is possible to give a happiness to the player that the player has over-winned.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment is that the arrangement and the number of the passage detection sensors 228 provided in the right variable winning device 65 are changed. Further, the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the audio lamp control device 113. The control process executed by the MPU 221 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are described in the fifth section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 81, the arrangement of the passage detection sensor 228 provided in the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a top view of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 81, the right variable prize winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment is provided on the inlet side (right side in front view) and on the outlet side (left side in front view) of the flow path provided on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. In addition, passage detection sensors 228g1 and 228g2 that can detect the passage of the game ball are provided. The passing detection sensor 228g1 can detect the game ball flowing into the flow path provided on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. The passage detection sensor 228g2 can detect a game ball that has passed through the flow path provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 and is discharged to the left side of the opening / closing door 65f1. In the sixth embodiment, the number of game balls (number of game balls detected by the passage detection sensor 228g1) flowing into the flow path provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 and the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 are provided. The number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 is calculated by calculating a difference from the number of game balls discharged from the flow path (number of game balls detected by the passage detection sensor 228g2). It is configured to be able to grasp more accurately.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 81, in the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment, the flow of the game ball is prevented (the period required for the game ball to pass through the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 by decelerating the game ball). In addition to the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1, convex portions 65f1d and 65f1e that can prevent the flow of the game ball are provided on the left and right sides of the open / close door 65f1. ing. By the convex portion 65f1d, the game ball flowing down from the right side of the right variable winning device 65 can be flowed into the flow path on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 from the front side of the upper surface of the right variable winning device 65. Moreover, when discharging from the flow path provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by the convex portion 65f1e, the discharge position can be limited to the front side in front of the right variable winning device 65. The flow path (the range not obstructed by the convex portions 65f1d and 65f1e) through which the game balls on the inlet side (right side in front view) and the outlet side (left side in front view) of the flow path on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 can pass. The width is configured to allow only one gaming ball to pass (a width corresponding to 1.5 gaming balls), and the passage detection sensors 228g1 and 228g2 are provided at the centers thereof, respectively. By detecting the passage on the inlet side and the outlet side by narrowing the flow path on the inlet side and the outlet side as compared with each of the above embodiments (a width corresponding to 1.5 game balls). The sensors 228g1 and 228g2 can more reliably detect game balls flowing into the flow path on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 and game balls flowing out from the flow path. Therefore, the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 can be grasped more accurately.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect that may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the variable display effect in the sixth embodiment will be described. Do. This right-handed anticipation suggestion effect is an effect that may be executed as part of a variable display effect that develops into a super reach or a special reach. It is an effect to suggest the degree of expectation whether it will be advantageous to the player. In other words, when more game balls reach the flow path on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 during the fluctuation display, the right specific winning port 65a is opened to indicate an expectation of whether or not an over winning will occur. Production.

  FIG. 82 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode during super reach in which a right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is set. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is executed in a part of the case where the development is a super reach or a special reach effect. In this right-handed expectation suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 82 (a), an image in which the character of an adventurer who possesses a sword and a shield and a monster that is an enemy are mixed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Displayed on the display screen. In addition, on the upper side of the display screen, there is formed a display area HR4 in which the characters “Defeat enemies!” Are displayed, and on the right side of the display area HR4, the third symbol that is changing in the reach state is reduced and displayed. Is done. With these display contents, the player can understand that if the adventurer can defeat the enemy monster, it will be a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the monster's torso has a flaw crossing the cross. Furthermore, a decoration imitating a wound attached to the monster's body is provided on the front view front side of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment. Thereby, the player can have an impression as if the wound of the monster is related to the right variable winning device 65. Although details will be described later, in the sixth embodiment, an effect is performed in which the adventurer makes an attack targeting a monster's wound. In accordance with this, as a player participation type effect, an effect of launching a game ball with the aim of the variable right prize winning device 65 decorated with a decoration imitating a monster's wound is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (b), in the right-handed anticipation suggestion effect, after an image in which the adventurer and the monster rub each other is displayed, the upper side is zoomed up from the abdomen of the monster and displayed. A display area HR5 on which a physical strength gauge LG indicating the remaining physical strength of the monster is displayed is formed on the right side. These display contents allow the player to visually understand and understand the remaining physical strength of the monster.

  In addition, an image of an arrow pointing to the monster's wound is displayed on the left side of the monster, and characters “I aim at the wound!” And an image simulating the wound are displayed on the display area HR4. Is displayed. Furthermore, the vicinity of the decorative part imitating a scratch in the right variable winning device 65 emits light in a color according to the expected degree of the current performance. By suggesting to the player that there is a possibility of over winning by launching a game ball aiming at the right variable winning device 65 with a decoration imitating a wound, based on the contents of these effects. Can do.

  Note that the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment incorporates light emitting diodes (LEDs) of a plurality of types of light emitting colors in order to emit light in the vicinity of a decorative part that simulates a scratch. That is, a white LED, a blue LED, a green LED, and a red LED are incorporated. Although details will be described later, in the sixth embodiment, white light emission color has the lowest expectation, blue has a higher expectation than white, green has a higher expectation than blue, and red has the highest expectation. Is configured to be high. This is advantageous when a game ball is launched onto the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 using the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65 as a clue (whether the right specific winning opening 65a is opened and an over winning is generated). I can make you guess. Therefore, it is possible to play a game paying attention to the content of the right-handed expectation level suggestion effect.

  FIG. 83 (a) shows a display mode when the player launches a game ball aiming at the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 by right-handing in the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 83 (a), after the display content (see FIG. 82 (b)) suggesting that the attack is aimed at the monster's wound in the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect, the game ball is displayed. Each time the vehicle passes the passage detection sensor 228g1, the adventurer attacks the monster's wound so that the monster's health gauge LG decreases by one gauge. By performing an effect in which this gauge decreases, it is possible to make the player feel as if it is easier to defeat the monster by making a right strike, so that the game ball can be positively hit right . Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect can be improved.

  In addition, in the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect in the sixth embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the number of physical strength gauges LG can be reduced to 0, while the special symbol lottery result is off. In this case, the remaining number is reduced to only one gauge (the number of gauges never becomes 0). As a result, a player who wants to know the lottery result of the special symbol before the third symbol is stopped and displayed is more actively fired toward the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. Can do. Thereby, the willingness to participate in the player's right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect can be further improved.

  FIG. 83 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the time when the change is stopped when the change display in which the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is set is executed by the special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 83 (b), when notifying the jackpot, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the display area HR3 in a state where the same numbers are aligned. In addition to this, an effect is performed in which the monster falls due to the adventurer's attack and the number of physical strength gauges is reduced to zero. Further, the word “win” is displayed on the display area HR4. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the game has been won.

  Also, these display contents continue to be displayed during the opening period. As described above, the sixth embodiment is configured such that the opening period is as extremely short as 0.5 seconds. Therefore, it is set as the structure which prevents that an effect becomes unnatural by performing an effect only for 0.5 second by performing using the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect until an opening period. At the end of the opening period, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened. Therefore, when the player has made a right turn during the execution of the right-handed expectation suggestion effect and the game ball has reached the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. Enters the right specific winning opening 65a where the game ball is opened.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the temporal change of the display mode before and after the variable display effect in which the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is set in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 (a) is a diagram showing a change over time in the display mode when a right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is executed as a variable display effect when a special symbol lottery is won. In FIG. 84 (a), a case where super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected as the variation type will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 84 (a), when the variable display corresponding to the jackpot is started, the normal variable display is started first, and the variable display of the third symbol constituting each symbol row is started. Then, when 10 seconds elapse after the third symbol variation display is started, a reach state occurs. That is, the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed in the third symbol with the same number, and only the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed.

  When 20 seconds elapses after the reach state has occurred, super-reach is developed and a right-handed expectation suggestion effect (see FIG. 82 (a)) is started. When 26 seconds have elapsed since the start of the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect (that is, the remaining 4 seconds until the end of the fluctuation), the characters “Aim for scratches!” Are displayed in the display area HR4. The effect (see FIG. 82 (b)) is executed. In this effect, as described above, the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65 is configured to suggest the degree of expectation of whether or not it is advantageous when a right-handed strike is made. Fire around 7 game balls by making a right strike for 4.5 seconds, the remaining 4 seconds until the end of the fluctuation time and 0.5 seconds of the jackpot opening period Therefore, around seven game balls can be entered almost simultaneously at the start of one round. In the following description, the effect of notifying the expectation of whether or not it will be advantageous when the right-handed light is emitted by the light emission color of the right variable prize-winning device 65 (the letter “Aim for scratches!” On the display screen). The effect that is displayed) is referred to as an “expectation notification effect”.

  Actually, since the majority of cases where the emission is started after confirming the emission color and determining whether or not the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, the longer the period required for the launch, the more the over winning a prize The number decreases. If the game ball is fired in the case of detachment, all the game balls that have been fired will be wasted (almost all game balls will be discharged from the out port 66). This is because if the game is performed by the game method to be performed, it will be lost. Therefore, it is accurately determined whether or not the right specific winning opening 65a is opened every time an effect (expectation notification effect) in which the character “I'm aiming for a wound !!” is displayed to the player. When it is determined that the game is released, it is possible to cause a game to be played in a way that promptly starts right-handed. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect can be improved, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  When 0.5 second of the opening period for the jackpot has elapsed, the first round of the jackpot is started, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened, and an effect indicating that the jackpot has started (effect corresponding to the opening effect) Are executed over a round period of one round and an interval period after the end of one round. Then, when the second round of jackpot is started, a normal jackpot presentation is executed. Compared to the case where the opening effect is executed during the 0.5 seconds of the actual opening period by configuring the effect corresponding to the opening effect over the period until the second round of jackpot is started. Thus, it is possible to notify the effect that the jackpot has been started for a sufficiently long time. Therefore, it can be made to recognize more reliably that the big hit was started with respect to the player.

  FIG. 84 (b) is a diagram showing the change over time of the display mode when the fluctuation type of the super-reach out of the fluctuation time of 60.5 seconds is determined as the fluctuation pattern and the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is set. is there. As shown in FIG. 84 (b), the temporal change of the effect mode in the case of losing is exactly the same as in the case of jackpot, at least until the expectation notification effect is generated. On the other hand, as described above, it is different from the case where the selection ratio of the luminescent color of the decoration portion of the right variable winning device 65 is a big hit. Therefore, when the expectation notification effect is generated, whether to start the right-handed shot is determined depending on whether the proportion selected at the jackpot is a high emission color or the emission color selected at a loss. The player can be judged.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (b), when 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, it is notified that the monster could not be defeated by the adventurer's attack, and the combination of the third symbol corresponding to the detachment is stopped. It is displayed and it is notified that it has come off. Thereby, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is off. The notification that this is off (stop display of the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the off) continues for 0.5 seconds. In addition, when it is off, the fluctuation time is longer for 0.5 seconds. When the big hit is, as described above, the right hit expectation degree suggestion is also used using the big hit opening period of 0.5 seconds. This is to execute the production. That is, even in the case of losing, by setting the same effect time as in the case of jackpot, it is possible to share the effect mode up to 60 seconds when the final result is notified. Therefore, since the effect can be executed using the common data, the amount of data for executing the right-handed expectation level suggestion effect can be reduced.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is set, the effect having the same aspect other than the light emission color selection rate of the decoration portion of the right variable winning device 65 is the effect end. Continue until 0.5 seconds ago. This allows the player to determine whether or not it is better to make a right turn using the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65 as a clue.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, after the expectation notification effect is generated, each time the game ball passes the passage detection sensor 228g1, the number of physical strength gauges LG indicating the physical strength of the monster is one. Decreases to be displayed. And when it is a big hit (the right specific winning opening 65a is opened), the physical strength gauge LG decreases to 0, while when it is off, the physical strength gauge LG decreases only to 1. Therefore, if the player continues to make a right turn, it may be possible to detect whether or not a big hit will occur. Since the initial value of the number of gauges is 5, the physical strength gauge LG can detect whether or not it is a big hit by causing five game balls to reach the passage detection sensor 228g1. That is, if the gauge number decreases to 0, it can be determined that it is a big hit. On the other hand, if the gauge number does not decrease from 1, it can be determined that it is off. However, it takes at least 3 seconds to fire 5 game balls. Then, it takes about 1 second before the launched game ball reaches the passage detection sensor 228g1. Therefore, even if the game balls are fired after confirming the emission color of the right variable winning device 65, it is difficult to pass the five game balls to the passage detection sensor 228g1. For this reason, it is possible to fire a game ball before the expectation notification effect is generated for a player who wants to detect the jackpot as soon as possible. In other words, according to the preference of each player, whether or not to make a right hit by guessing from the light emission color of the right variable prize winning device 65 whether or not the game is able to know whether it is a big hit as soon as possible. The player can select the gameability to be determined. Therefore, since it is possible to provide the gameability according to the preference for each player, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player with respect to the game.

  In the sixth embodiment, when a right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is set in the variable display effect corresponding to the jackpot, when five or more game balls pass through the passage detection sensor 228g1, the physical strength gauge LG is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a big win, the number of physical strength gauges LG can be reduced to 0 at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 50%). In other cases, the number of gauges is reduced only until the number of gauges becomes 1. You may comprise. With this configuration, even when the number of gauges is reduced to only 1, the expectation for jackpot can be maintained.

<Electric Configuration in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 85 and FIG. 86, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 85A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 85A, the ROM 222 in the sixth embodiment is an effect mode selection table for the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14A). The difference is that 222b is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the fifth embodiment described above, the details thereof are omitted.

  The effect mode selection table 222b is a data table that is referred to when selecting an effect mode to be executed in the variable display effect. In this effect mode selection table 222b, a plurality of effect modes including the above-mentioned right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect are defined, and an aspect corresponding to the value of an effect lottery counter 223j described later is determined at the start of the variable display effect. Is done. Details of the effect mode selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the effect mode selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 86, in the effect mode selection table 222b, an effect mode that can be selected and a range of values of the effect lottery counter 223j are defined in association with each variation type. Specifically, for the variation type “win special reach”, a normal effect is defined as an effect type in association with the value range “0 to 39” of the effect lottery counter 223j (222b1 in FIG. 86). reference). This normal performance is a general term for performance modes in which it becomes difficult to determine whether or not it is advantageous when a right-handed strike is made until immediately before the change stop. More specifically, whether or not the big win is determined from the production mode, except for whether or not the third figure with the same number is attached at the end of the fluctuation in the case of the big hit and the case of a loss. This is an aspect of the aspect that makes it difficult. When this normal performance is executed, it cannot be determined whether or not it is a big hit until the third symbol is stopped. Therefore, even if the player senses a big hit and starts making a right hit, the first round is started before more than two game balls reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. Therefore, when the normal performance is selected, it is difficult to make an over prize in the first round.

  Of the 100 values “0 to 99” that the value of the effect lottery counter 223j can take, the counter value associated with the “normal effect” is 40, so the variation type of the hit special reach is determined In addition, the ratio at which the normal effect is determined as the effect mode is 40% (40/100).

  On the other hand, for the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223j “40 to 99”, a right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is associated and defined as an effect mode (see 222b2 to 222b5 in FIG. 86). Among these, in the range of “40 to 49”, a right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect in which an expectation notification effect in an aspect in which “white” is set as the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65 is defined in association with it. (Refer to 222b2 in FIG. 86), the range of “50 to 74” is defined in association with a mode in which “blue” is set as the emission color (see 222b3 in FIG. 86), and the range of “75 to 90”. Is defined in association with a mode in which “green” is set as the emission color (see 222b4 in FIG. 86), and a mode in which “red” is set as the emission color in the range of “90 to 99”. They are defined in association with each other (see 222b5 in FIG. 86).

  Out of 100 possible values of the value of the effect lottery counter 223j, the counter values associated with the light emission colors “white”, “blue”, “green”, “red” are 10, 25, Since 15 and 10 are used, the ratios for determining the emission colors are 10% (10/100), 25% (25/100), 15% (15/100), and 10% (10/100), respectively. is there.

  For the variation type “win super reach”, a normal effect is defined as an effect type in association with the value range “0 to 74” of the effect lottery counter 223j (see 222b6 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, there are 75 counter values associated with the “normal effect”. Therefore, when the variation type of the hit super reach is determined, The rate at which the effect is determined is 75% (75/100).

  On the other hand, for the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223j “75 to 99”, a right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is associated and defined as an effect mode (see 222b7 and 222b8 in FIG. 86). Among these, the range of “75 to 94” is defined in association with “white” as the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 in the expectation notification effect (see 222b7 in FIG. 86), and “95 to 99”. The range defines a mode in which “red” is set as the emission color (see 222b8 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 values that the value of the effect lottery counter 223j can take, there are 20 and 5 counter values associated with the light emission colors “white” and “red”, so each light emission color is determined. The proportions are 20% (20/100) and 5% (5/100), respectively.

  For the variation type “outside special reach”, a normal effect is defined as an effect type in association with the value range “0 to 89” of the effect lottery counter 223j (see 222b9 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, there are 90 counter values associated with the “normal effect”, so that when the variation type of outlier special reach is determined, the effect mode is normal. The rate at which the effect is determined is 90% (90/100).

  On the other hand, for the range “90 to 99” of the value of the effect lottery counter 223j, a right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is associated and defined as the effect mode (see 222b10 to 222b12 in FIG. 86). Among these, the range of “90 to 96” is defined in association with “white” as the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 in the expectation notification effect (see 222b10 in FIG. 86). The range is defined in association with a mode in which “blue” is set as the emission color (refer to 222b11 in FIG. 86), and a mode in which “green” is set as the emission color corresponds to “99”. (See 222b12 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 values that the value of the effect lottery counter 223j can take, the counter values associated with the light emission colors “white”, “blue”, and “green” are 7, 2, and 1, respectively. The ratio in which each luminescent color is determined is 7% (7/100), 2% (2/100), and 1% (1/100), respectively.

  That is, when the hit special reach is compared with the outlier special reach, the hit special reach has a higher ratio of selecting the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect (the ratio of the normal effect being selected is lower). Therefore, when a right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is executed, a sense of expectation for the jackpot can be given. In addition, in the hit special reach, the determination ratio of the “white” and “blue” emission colors is lower when the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is determined, while the “green” The determination ratio of the emission color is increased. Also, only in the case of a hit special reach, there is a possibility that the “red” emission color is determined. Therefore, when the emission color becomes “green”, it is possible to make the player think that there is a high possibility that it is more advantageous to make a right strike. In addition, when it becomes “red”, the player can be notified that the right specific winning opening 65a is opened.

  For the variation type “outgoing super reach”, a normal effect is defined as an effect type in association with the value range “0 to 94” of the effect lottery counter 223j (see 222b13 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, the counter value associated with the “normal effect” is 95. Therefore, when the variation type of outlier superreach is determined, The rate at which the production is determined is 95% (95/100).

  On the other hand, with respect to the value range “95 to 99” of the effect lottery counter 223j, an expectation notification effect corresponding to the light emission color “white” is defined in association with the effect mode (222b14 in FIG. 86). reference). Of the 100 values that the value of the effect lottery counter 223j can take, there are five counter values associated with the expectation notification effect of “white” as the emission color, so the expectation notification of the emission color as “white” is provided. The rate at which the effect is determined is 5% (5/100).

  That is, when the hit super reach is compared with the outlier super reach, the hit super reach has a higher ratio of selecting the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect (the ratio of selecting the normal effect is lower). Therefore, when a right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is executed, a sense of expectation for the jackpot can be given. Further, in the hit super reach, the determination ratio of the “white” emission color in the case where the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is determined is lower than that in the miss super reach. Also, only in the case of a hit special reach, there is a possibility that the “red” emission color is determined. Therefore, when the emission color becomes “white”, it is possible to cause the player to guess whether it is more advantageous or not to make a right strike. In addition, when it becomes “red”, the player can be notified that the right specific winning opening 65a is opened.

  In addition, fluctuation types other than “variation special hit”, “win super reach”, “outgoing special reach”, “outgoing super reach” (“per normal reach”, “outgoing normal reach”, “long out”, “short out” ")" Is defined in association with "normal effects" in relation to all the range of values that the effect lottery counter 223j can take (see 222b15 in FIG. 86). For this reason, when the variation type is “winning normal reach”, “outgoing normal reach”, “outside long”, or “outside short”, the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is not executed.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the ratio for determining the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect and the ratio for selecting each emission color in the expectation notification effect in the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect are determined according to the variation type. The configuration is different. Thereby, it is possible to make the player determine whether it is better to make a right turn from the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65 when the expectation notification effect is executed. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 85B, the RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14B) in that an effect lottery counter 223j, a passing number counter 223k, The difference is that a notification effect flag 223m, a physical strength gauge counter 223n, a notification standby flag 223p, and a notification type storage area 223q are added.

  The effect lottery counter 223j is a counter used for selecting a variation display effect mode from the above-described effect mode selection table 222b (see FIG. 86), and its value is updated in the range of “0 to 99”. At the start of fluctuation, an effect mode corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223j is selected from the effect mode selection table 222b.

  The passing number counter 223k is a counter for counting the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. The value of the passing number counter 223k is 1 every time the passing of the game ball is detected (the output becomes H) by the passing detection sensor 228g1 provided on the upstream side of the passing detection sensors 228g1 and 228g2. It is added one by one. That is, 1 is added each time a game ball flows into the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. The value of the passing number counter 223k is incremented by one every time the passing of the game ball is detected (the output becomes H) by the passing detection sensor 228g2 provided on the downstream side. That is, 1 is subtracted every time the game ball flows out from the flow path on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1.

  The notification effect flag 223m indicates whether or not the expectation notification effect (the effect of notifying the expectation of whether or not it is advantageous when the right-handed light is emitted from the right variable winning device 65) is being executed. It is a flag which shows. If the notification effect flag 223m is on, it indicates that the expectation notification effect is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the expectation notification effect is not being executed. The notification effect in-progress flag 223m is set to ON when the start of the expectation notification effect is set (see S4708 in FIG. 88), and is set to OFF when the jackpot is started.

  The physical strength gauge counter 223n is a counter indicating the number of physical strength gauges LG displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the expectation notification effect. As the counter value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n, a value obtained by subtracting the value of the passing number counter 223k from the maximum value of the physical strength gauge number “5” is set as an initial value at the start of the expectation notification effect (FIG. 88). S4706). As a result, if the game ball is hit right before the expectation notification effect is started and a plurality of game balls are passing the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 at the start of the expectation notification effect, the expectation During execution of the degree notification effect, it is possible to shorten the period required to reduce the number of gauges of the physical strength gauge counter LG. Therefore, a player who wants to know as soon as possible whether or not the big hit will be able to hit the game ball right before the expectation notification effect is started. If the value of the passing number counter 223k is 4 or more at the start of the expectation notification effect, the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is uniformly set to 1 regardless of the value of the passing number counter 223k (FIG. 88). S4705). That is, even in the case of a big hit, the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG does not become 0 immediately after the start of the expectation notification effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player determine whether or not it is better to start the right stroke based on the emission color of the right variable winning device 65. This physical strength gauge counter 223n detects the passing of the game ball by the upstream passage detection sensor 228g1 until the lower limit value set for each special symbol lottery result (0 for big win, 1 for off) is reached. Each time the value is updated, the value is updated by subtracting 1 (see S4217 in FIG. 87).

  The notification standby flag 223p is a flag indicating whether or not the variable display effect in which the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is set is being executed and the start timing of the expectation degree notification effect has not been reached. This notification standby flag 223p is set to ON when execution of the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is determined (see S4805 in FIG. 90), and is set to OFF when the start of the expectation degree notification effect is set. (See S4708 in FIG. 88).

  The notification type storage area 223q is a storage area in which data indicating the type of expectation notification effect (light emission color of the right variable winning device 65) executed in the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is stored. When the type of expectation notification effect is determined with reference to the effect mode selection table 222b at the start of fluctuation, data corresponding to the determined type is stored in this notification type storage area 223q (FIG. 90). (See S4804). In addition, the notification type storage area 223q is configured by, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and if “01H” is stored, the notification type storage area 223q indicates an expectation notification effect in which the emission color “white” is set, and “02H” is stored. If it is set, it indicates an expectation notification effect in which the emission color “blue” is set. If “03H” is stored, it indicates an expectation notification effect in which the emission color “green” is set, and “04H” is stored. If it is set, the expectation notification effect in which the emission color “red” is set is shown. On the other hand, when “00H” is stored, it indicates that the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is not set.

<Control Processing of Audio Lamp Control Device in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90. First, the effect update processing 6 (S4121) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This effect update process 6 (S4121) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) instead of the effect update process (see FIG. 35), and updates the effect mode according to the game situation. It is processing of.

  In this effect update process 6 (see FIG. 87), first, the output of the passage detection sensor 228g1 disposed on the upstream side of the upper surface of the right variable winning device 65 (the inlet side of the flow path on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1) is H. It is determined whether it is (high) (S4211), and if it is determined that the output is H (S4211: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the passing number counter 223k and updated (S4212). Next, it is determined whether or not the notification effect flag 223m is on (S4213), and if it is determined that the notification effect flag 223m is on (S4213: Yes), the state of the physical strength gauge LG is updated. After executing the process (S4214 to S4218) for performing the process, the process proceeds to S4219. On the other hand, when it is determined that the output of the passage detection sensor 228g1 is L in the process of S4211 (S4211: No), and when it is determined that the notification effect flag 223m is off in the process of S4213 (S4213: No). Since there is no possibility of changing the display mode of the physical strength gauge LG, the processing of S4214 to S4218 for updating the mode of the physical strength gauge LG is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4219.

  Here, the process for updating the aspect of the physical strength gauge LG will be described in detail. In the process for updating the physical strength gauge LG, it is first determined whether or not the current special symbol lottery was a big win (S4214), and if it is determined that the current special symbol lottery is a big winner ( Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 1 or more (S4215). That is, it is determined whether or not the lower limit (0) when the gauge number of the strength gauge LG is hit, and the value of the fitness gauge counter 223n is 1 or more (the gauge number has not reached the lower limit). If it is determined (S4215: Yes), the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is updated by subtracting 1 (S4217), and the display mode of the physical strength gauge LG is changed to the number of gauges corresponding to the updated value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n. (S4218) and the process proceeds to S4219. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4215 that the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 0 (the number of gauges has reached the lower limit) (S4215: No), it is not necessary to update the display mode of the physical strength gauge LG. , S4217, S4218 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4219.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4214, when it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is out of place (not a big hit) (S4214: No), the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is then 2 or more. It is determined whether or not (S4216). That is, it is determined whether or not the lower limit value (1) of the physical strength gauge LG is reached (S4216), and the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 2 or more (the gauge number has reached the lower limit value). (S4216: Yes), the process of S4217 and S4218 for updating the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n and the display mode of the physical strength gauge LG is executed, and the process proceeds to S4219. . On the other hand, in the processing of S4216, when it is determined that the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 1 (the lower limit value of the number of gauges in the case of detachment) (S4216: No), the display mode of the physical strength gauge LG is updated. Since there is no need, the processes of S4217 and S4218 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4219.

  In the process of S4219, it is determined whether or not the output of the passage detection sensor 228g2 provided on the downstream side of the upper surface of the right variable winning device 65 (the outlet side of the flow path on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1) is H (high). (S4219), when it is determined that the output is H (the game ball has passed) (S4219: Yes), the value of the passing number counter 223k is decremented by 1 and updated (S4220), and the process proceeds to S4221. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S4219, when it is determined that the output of the passage detection sensor 228g2 is L (the passage of the game ball is not detected) (S4219: No), the process of S4220 is skipped and the process is performed in S4221. Migrate to

  In the process of S4221, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the expectation notification effect, and when the start timing is reached, a notification start determination process for executing the expectation notification effect is executed (S4221). Exit. Details of the notification start determination process (S4221) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the above-described notification start determination process (S4221). In the notification start determination process (S4221), first, it is determined whether the notification standby flag 223p is on (S4701). If it is determined that the notification standby flag 223p is off (S4701: No), the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is executed. It is not in the middle, or the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is being executed, but it means that the expectation notification effect has already been started, and there is no possibility of starting the expectation notification effect, so as it is This process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4701 that the notification standby flag 223p is on (S4701: Yes), it is then determined whether it is the start timing of the expectation notification effect (S4702). If it is determined that it is not the start timing (S4702: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4702 that the expectation notification effect start timing has come (S4702: Yes), the value of the passing number counter 223k is read (S4703), and the read counter value is 4 or more. Whether or not (S4704).

  In the process of S4704, when it is determined that the value of the passing number counter 223k is 4 or more, the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is set to 1 (S4705), and the process proceeds to S4707. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4704 that the value of the passage number counter 223k is less than 4, the value obtained by subtracting the value of the passage number counter 223k from 5 which is the maximum value of the number of gauges is the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n. (S4706), and the process proceeds to S4707. Thus, in the sixth embodiment, the initial value of the number of physical strength gauges LG at the start of the expectation notification effect is set to the value of the passing number counter 223k (the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1). ) To be different according to the). As a result, a player who wants to know whether or not he / she wants to win a bonus as soon as possible will have more game balls on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 by hitting right before the expectation notification effect is started. You can make it seem to reach.

  In the process of S4707, the start of the expectation notification effect is set in a manner corresponding to the data stored in the notification type storage area 223q and the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n set in the process of S4705 or S4706. (S4707). Specifically, the right variable winning device 65 is caused to emit light with the emission color corresponding to the data stored in the notification type storage area 223q, and the gauge number corresponding to the counter value of the fitness gauge counter 223n is set to the fitness gauge LG. Set as display mode. Next, the notification standby flag 223p is set to OFF, and the notification effect flag 223m is set to ON (S4708), and this process ends.

  By executing the notification start determination process (see FIG. 88), the expected degree notification effect of the aspect selected from the effect mode selection table 222b can be accurately executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the variable display setting process 6 (S4122) in the sixth embodiment will be described. This variable display setting process 6 (S4122) is a process executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38). Of the variable display setting process 6 (S4122) in the sixth embodiment, the processes of S4501 to S4509 are the same as the processes of S4501 to S4509 in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38). .

  Further, in the variation display setting process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S4503 is completed, the effect mode of the aspect according to the variation pattern (variation type) extracted in the process of S4503 is selected as the effect mode. An effect mode selection process for determining from the table 222b is executed (S4511), and the process proceeds to S4504. Details of the effect mode selection process (S4511) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing effect aspect selection processing (S4511). In this effect mode selection process (S4511), first, the effect mode selection table 222b and the value of the effect lottery counter 223j are read (S4801), and the main controller 110 uses the variation pattern command from the read effect mode selection table 222b. The production mode corresponding to the variation type notified from the production value and the value of the production lottery counter 223j is specified (S4802).

  Next, it is determined whether the specified effect mode is an effect mode corresponding to the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect (S4803), and when it is determined that the right-handed expectation level suggestion effect is not executed (S4803). : No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4803, when an aspect with a right-handed expectation degree suggesting effect is specified, data corresponding to the current effect state (light emission color of the right variable winning device 65) is stored in the notification type storage area 223q. (S4804), the notification standby flag 223p is set to ON (S4805), and this process is terminated.

  By executing this effect mode selection process (see FIG. 89), the effect mode of the expectation notification effect can be selected from the effect mode selection table 222b at a rate corresponding to the variation type, so the expectation notification effect Is executed, it can be estimated whether it is advantageous to make a right turn from the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65, and the player can determine whether to start the right turn.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, 0.5 seconds is set as the jackpot opening period regardless of the jackpot type. In other words, unless a game ball is fired toward the right variable prize-winning device 65 before the jackpot is started, at the start of the first round of jackpot, the number of game balls exceeding the prescribed number (two) It is configured such that the passage on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 cannot pass. And the expectation degree notification effect for notifying the degree of expectation that the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in a part of the change display effect for notifying the jackpot and a part of the change display effect for notifying the loss Is configured to be executable. This allows the player to determine from the content of the expectation notification effect whether or not to start the right-hand strike while the variable display effect is being executed (before the special symbol lottery result is notified). If the right-handed start is started during the execution of the variable display and the right specific winning opening 65a is opened as the player aims, an over winning can be generated, so that the player can be satisfied. Also, if the right specific winning opening 65a is closed as it is aimed by the player (ie, it has been missed by a lottery of special symbols) without making a right turn while the variable display is being executed, It is possible to give a sense of relief to the fact that it was possible to avoid hitting and consuming the ball. On the other hand, when the result is contrary to the player's aim (when the right specific winning opening 65a is not opened even though the right strike is performed, and the right specific winning opening 65a is opened even though the right strike is not performed. ), The next expectation notification effect can give a sense of purpose to make a prediction as to whether or not it is better to be right-handed. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, the opening period is made common regardless of the jackpot type, and it is determined to the player whether or not it is better to make a right turn while the variable display is being performed under the control of the sound lamp control device 113 side. By adopting a configuration for determining, the advantage of the first round (the number of game balls to be awarded to the right specific winning opening 65a) is varied for each jackpot. Accordingly, unlike the above-described fifth embodiment, the main control device 110 does not need to provide the period length selection table 202e (see FIG. 76C) that defines the correspondence between the jackpot type and the closing period. The capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced. Further, since the control process for selecting the opening period is also a process for simply setting a common period, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 needs to perform main control related to the game such as the big win lottery and the change display of the first symbol, so various main controls can be performed by reducing the processing load. It can be executed reliably.

  In the sixth embodiment, the expectation notification effect is configured to indicate the expectation level of whether or not it is advantageous to perform the right-handed shot based on the emission color of the right variable winning device 65. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. Instead of this, or in addition to this, for example, it may be configured to show the degree of expectation by changing the color and mode of the monster displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the degree of expectation depending on the content of the adventurer's attack It is good also as a structure which alert | reports. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports an expectation degree by changing a music and a sound effect instead of or in addition to the light emission color of the right variable prize-winning apparatus 65 and the display mode of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81.

  In the sixth embodiment, all jackpot type opening periods are unified to 0.5 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as in the fifth embodiment described above, the opening period is made different according to the jackpot type, and a part of the case where the opening period becomes a short jackpot (and when the special symbol lottery is missed) Thus, the expectation notification effect may be executed while the variable display is being executed. Thereby, when it becomes a jackpot type with a long opening period, it can be made right-handed in peace after the jackpot is notified. In addition, when the expectation notification effect is executed, the player determines whether it is better to start right-handing while the variable display is being executed based on the notification content (light emission color of the right variable winning device 65). It is possible to provide game play.

  In the sixth embodiment, in the expectation notification effect, the right symbol winning device 65 is decorated with a flaw and a display prompting the third symbol display device 81 to aim at the flaw is performed. Although it is the structure which indirectly suggests the right strike to the player, it is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports a right strike clearly in an anticipation degree notification effect. By configuring in this way, it can be easily understood that there is a possibility that it is advantageous (over-winning occurs) by making a right strike on the player.

  In the sixth embodiment, by performing an expectation notification effect that informs the expectation of whether or not it will be advantageous to the player when making a right turn, the right turn is performed during the execution of the variable display. The expectation notification effect is not necessarily the right variable winning device 65 in this embodiment (a plurality of games at positions where winning is possible when the right specific winning opening 65a is opened). It is not necessary to combine with a variable winning device having a structure that can hold the ball. For example, the expectation notification effect is applied to a pachinko machine 10 provided with only a variable winning device capable of winning only game balls launched after being opened, such as the left variable winning device 650. Also good. That is, it is good also as a structure which performs an expectation degree alerting | reporting effect as an effect which alert | reports only the expectation degree whether it will be a jackpot after completion | finish of a fluctuation | variation.

  In the sixth embodiment, the expectation notification effect is configured to be executable even when the special symbol lottery is missed. However, only when the special symbol lottery is a big win, the expectation notification effect is provided. It is good also as a structure which performs. In this case, it is good also as a structure which varies the timing which starts an anticipation alerting | reporting effect. In other words, in the sixth embodiment, the expectation notification effect is generated 4 seconds before the end of the fluctuation time. However, for example, at any timing of 4 seconds, 2 seconds, or 1 second by lottery. It is good also as a structure which an expectation degree alerting | reporting effect generate | occur | produces. Further, in this case, for example, as the number of continuous display of the variable display corresponding to the deviation increases, the ratio that the expectation notification effect is generated 4 seconds or 2 seconds ago may be increased. In other words, as the number of consecutive misses increases, the right-handed expectation suggestion effect may be selected as a big hit, and the right-handed may be executed for a longer period during the execution of the variable display. . By configuring in this way, the more the number of executions of the variable display since the last big hit, the easier the number of winning balls in the first round in the case of winning the big win. In addition, it is possible to make the player think that the game is continued until the big hit. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, for example, an apparatus capable of measuring time such as RTC (Real-Time-Clock) may be provided, and a timing at which an expected degree notification effect is likely to be generated may be changed according to a time zone. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that he / she wants to play a game in a time zone in which the expectation notification effect is likely to occur 4 seconds before or 2 seconds before the end of the change.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 to 99, a pachinko machine 10 according to a seventh embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment described above, operation winning ports (right operation winning port 661 and left operation winning port 662) are provided on the upper right side and the lower left side of the game board 13 as triggers for starting the big hits, respectively, depending on the type of jackpot Therefore, the winning prize opening that triggers the start of the jackpot is different. In addition, the left operation winning opening 662 is configured such that a game ball enters almost automatically in a relatively short time (about 0.5 seconds) when the jackpot standby state is entered. That is, when the left action winning opening 662 becomes a left trigger big hit that triggers the start of the big hit, the first round of the big hit is started before the game ball reaches the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. On the other hand, when the right action winning opening 661 is a right trigger big hit that triggers the start of a big hit, the game balls reach the flow path on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 during the big hit standby state and then the right The game ball is made to enter the operating winning port 661 so that the player can aim for over winning.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, even if the left opportunity jackpot is won, the game ball moves to the left action winning opening 662 if the player does not make a left strike after entering the jackpot waiting state. It is configured so that there is no possibility of entering. And in the jackpot waiting state, it is set as the structure which produces the effect as if it is a normal game state as an effect performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. In other words, during the jackpot waiting state, a pseudo display effect or the like of the third symbol is executed, and it is as if the player has not shifted to the jackpot waiting state (whether the player is in the normal gaming state). It is possible to make a mistake and continue left-handed. In other words, when the left opportunity jackpot is hit, the player is left-handed by performing an effect that is difficult for the player to recognize that the jackpot standby state has been entered, and the upper face of the door 65f1 is opened. The game ball is made to enter the left operation winning opening 662 immediately before the player is aware of the game ball reaching. As a result, when the left opportunity jackpot is reached, the jackpot is started after the number of game balls exceeding the specified number (two, which is the upper limit number of the first round) reaches the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. On the other hand, when it becomes difficult to hit the right opportunity, it is easy to enter the game ball into the right operation winning opening 661 at the timing when many game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Over winning can be generated. Therefore, as in the second embodiment described above, the advantage (the number of winning balls that can be obtained) of the first round can be made different between the left opportunity jackpot and the right opportunity jackpot, so pay attention to the jackpot type and play the game. Can be done.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the sound lamp control device 113 The configuration of the RAM 223 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in the second section. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 91, the board | substrate surface structure of the game board 13 in this 7th Embodiment is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 91, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment is different from the game board 13 (see FIG. 54) in the second embodiment in that the storage device 675 is deleted. ing. When the storage device 675 is deleted, even if the left opportunity jackpot is won and the jackpot standby state is entered, the game ball immediately enters the left operation winning opening 662 as in the second embodiment described above. Never do. That is, even in the case of a left-handed jackpot, if the game ball is not entered into the operation winning opening 662 by left-handed in the jackpot waiting state, the jackpot will not be started. In the seventh embodiment, when the left trigger jackpot is reached, the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed with the third symbol of the out-of-combination combination, and after shifting to the jackpot standby state, the normal gaming state In the same manner as in FIG. Thereby, it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the player has been in the jackpot standby state, and after the player has entered the jackpot standby state, the left-handed game is continued and the game ball enters the left operation winning opening 662. It is configured as follows. Therefore, as in the second embodiment, the right opportunity jackpot can be generated aiming for an overwinning, but if the left opportunity jackpot is reached, the jackpot will start soon without aiming for the overwinning Can be provided. In addition, of the game balls launched by left-handed hitting, the proportion of game balls that enter the left operation winning opening 662 is configured to be higher than the proportion that enters the first entrance 64. . Thereby, when it becomes the jackpot waiting state for the left opportunity jackpot, it is possible to enter the game ball (win) into the left operation winning opening 662 in a shorter period of time. Although illustration is omitted, the control process for opening and closing the storage valve 675a of the storage device 675 is also deleted due to the storage device 675 being deleted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 92, a description will be given of the change in the effect mode over time from when the variable display is started until when the jackpot is started when the left trigger jackpot is reached. FIG. 92 is a diagram exemplifying a case where a variable display effect corresponding to the left trigger jackpot (a super reach per variable time of 60 seconds) is executed in a state where two reserved balls are stored at the start of the fluctuation. . As shown in FIG. 92, when the change display corresponding to the left opportunity jackpot is executed, it is notified in a pseudo manner that the change has been lost at the end of the change. That is, in the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of detachment. At this time, the first symbol display device 37 stops and displays the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot. However, the third symbol display device 81 is larger than the first symbol display device 37 and is disposed at a position easy to see. Therefore, most players are unaware that the first symbol display device 37 is a winning stop symbol, so that the player who has confirmed the display content of the third symbol display device 81 has a special symbol. It can be made to think that the lottery result has come off (it has not shifted to the jackpot waiting state).

  As shown in FIG. 92, when the variation display corresponding to the left trigger jackpot ends, the jackpot standby state is started, and pseudo variation display is started on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the fluctuating display corresponding to the two held balls that are held during the execution of the fluctuating display corresponding to the left opportunity jackpot is executed in a pseudo manner. In this pseudo fluctuation display, a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set for each, and a stop symbol corresponding to a complete deviation is stopped and displayed at the end of the fluctuation. In order to execute the pseudo variation display, the display control device 114 provides a display data table for pseudo variation display. Further, when the pseudo variation display is executed in the big hit waiting state, the number of reserved balls displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also reduced in a pseudo manner. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if the number of held balls is decreasing every 2 seconds, so that a game ball is additionally entered into the first entrance 64 and a special symbol lottery is executed. You can make them think. When the pseudo variation display ends and the pseudo hold ball disappears, a pseudo variation stop state is set. This pseudo change stop state is exactly the same display mode as when the number of reserved balls becomes zero in the normal gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the lottery of the special symbol is not executed unless the game ball is entered into the first entrance 64, so that the player can be more actively left-handed. .

  In addition, in this embodiment, it is set as the structure which wins the left opportunity jackpot only by the lottery of a 1st special symbol similarly to 2nd Embodiment mentioned above. In other words, the situation of winning the left opportunity jackpot is limited to a gaming state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol) in which a game is aimed at the first entrance 64. As a result, in the case of a pseudo change display effect or a pseudo change stop state, the direction in which the player launches the game ball in order to continue the game (to make a special symbol lottery), 13 to the left. Therefore, in a pseudo normal state, a player who tries to continue the game can more reliably enter the game ball into the left operation winning opening 662.

  When the game ball enters the left operation winning opening 662 by continuously making a left strike in the jackpot waiting state, a special aspect effect (blackout effect) is executed. Although details will be described later, this blackout effect that does not occur during the normal gaming state is executed, so that the player immediately understands that the jackpot standby state has been started and that the jackpot will start. be able to. This blackout effect is executed for 0.1 seconds of the opening period, and a normal jackpot effect is started after the effect ends.

  In addition, in the pseudo variation stop state, if no winning to the left operation winning opening 662 is detected even after 3 seconds, the pseudo variation stop state is ended and the standby state effect (FIG. 7). ). The pseudo-fluctuation stop state is completed in 3 seconds when the player wants to leave the game at the timing when the variable stop state is reached, before the player leaves the table. This is to make the player aware that he was actually in a jackpot waiting state. In other words, this is to prevent the player from leaving the seat in a state where the jackpot is confirmed, and starting another game from the jackpot standby state by another player. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing the game even though the jackpot was won, and causing the player to be dissatisfied with the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, an effect aspect during the left opportunity big hit in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 (a) is a diagram showing a blackout effect executed in the opening period of the left opportunity jackpot. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when winning the left opportunity jackpot and shifting to the jackpot standby state, by executing the pseudo variation display and the pseudo variation stop state effect, the jackpot standby It is difficult for the player to recognize that the state has been reached. During the execution of these pseudo effects, when the game ball wins the left action winning opening 662 and starts the jackpot, the opening period is very short (0.1 second), so the third symbol is the winning combination. There is no period for notifying the jackpot by producing a stop display. Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, the blackout effect shown in FIG. 93 (a) can be used as an aspect that allows the player to understand at a glance that the special effect has been executed, and to shorten the effect time. It is configured to execute. In other words, when the game ball wins the left action winning opening 662 and the opening period of the left trigger jackpot is reached, the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 suddenly darkens (blacks out). It is configured to be executed. By making it look very different from the pseudo change display or pseudo change stop state effect that was executed until then, it can make the player understand that a special effect was executed instantly it can.

  After the blackout effect is finished, the effect shown in FIG. 93 (b) indicating that the jackpot has started is executed. That is, in the main display area Dm, the characters “Big hit confirmed!” Are displayed, and the third display with the same number is stopped and displayed in a state where three symbols are arranged. Further, in the small area Ds1, a display indicating the number of rounds (characters “1 round”) and a display indicating the number of awarded balls (characters “0000 GET”) are displayed. In addition, in the small area Ds3, a character “right-handed!” And a right-pointing arrow graphic for launching a game ball toward the right specific winning opening 65a are displayed. These display contents allow the player to immediately understand that the jackpot has already started.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 94, the RAM 223 in the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14B) in that a pseudo-pending ball counter 223r In addition, a pseudo normal state flag 223s, a pseudo fluctuation timer 223t, and a pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u are added.

  The pseudo-pending ball number counter 223r is a counter that indicates the number of pseudo-variable display holds after winning the left opportunity jackpot and entering the jackpot standby state. In the big hit waiting state, while the value of the pseudo-pending ball number counter 223r is 1 or more, pseudo fluctuation display is repeatedly executed (see S4907 in FIG. 96), and the value of the pseudo-pending ball number counter 223r becomes zero. When the pseudo variation display is finished in the state, a pseudo variation stop state is set (see S4906 in FIG. 96). The pseudo-reserved ball number counter 223r is set with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c at the time of transition to the jackpot standby state corresponding to the left opportunity jackpot ( (See S4614 in FIG. 98). That is, the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r includes at least a counter for counting the number of reserved balls of the pseudo first special symbol and a counter for counting the number of reserved balls of the pseudo second special symbol. Has been. Further, the pseudo-reserved ball number counter 223r is decremented by 1 each time the start of pseudo variation display is set (see S4908 in FIG. 96).

  The pseudo-normal state flag 223s is set in the case where the effect (pseudo-normal state effect) is executed as if it is a pseudo-normal game state in the jackpot waiting state (when the left opportunity jackpot is won) It is a flag indicating whether or not a big hit waiting state. If the pseudo normal state flag 223s is on, it indicates that the pseudo normal state effect is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the pseudo normal state effect is not being executed. This pseudo-normal state flag 223s is set to ON when the left opportunity jackpot is won and the jackpot waiting state is started (see S4617 in FIG. 98). On the other hand, the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is displayed when the pseudo-normal state effect ends (when a game ball enters the left operation winning opening 662 and shifts to a jackpot opening period, or a pseudo fluctuation stop state is displayed. When the stand-by effect is started for 3 seconds, it is set to off (see S4912 in FIG. 96 and S4617 in FIG. 98).

  The pseudo fluctuation timer 223t is a timer for measuring the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation display. In this pseudo-fluctuating timer 223t, a timer value corresponding to 2 seconds (that is, 2000) is set every time the start of pseudo fluctuation display is set (see S4907 in FIG. 96). Whether or not the pseudo variation display is being executed is determined based on whether or not the value of the pseudo variation timer 223t is zero.

  The pseudo variation stop state timer 223u is a timer that measures the duration of the pseudo variation stop state. In the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u, a timer value corresponding to 3 seconds (that is, 3000) is set at the timing when the pseudo fluctuation stop state is set (see S4906 in FIG. 96). When this pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u becomes 0, it means that 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the pseudo fluctuation stop state, so the start of the standby state effect is set. Even if the player decides to quit the game by ending the pseudo-fluctuation stop state in 3 seconds, the player is in a jackpot waiting state before the player leaves the table. This can make the player aware of this. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing the game even though he has won the left opportunity jackpot and making the player dissatisfied with the game.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 to 99, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 95, the main process 7 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. The main process 7 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 34) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment).

  Of the main process 7 (see FIG. 95) in the seventh embodiment, the processes in S4101 to S4118 are the same as the processes in S4101 to S4118 of the main process (see FIG. 34) in the second embodiment. Executed. Further, in the main process 7 (see FIG. 95) in the seventh embodiment, after the effect update process (S4111) is finished, the pseudo for setting the effect mode while the pseudo normal state is set. A normal state effect process is executed (S4131), and the process proceeds to S4112. Details of the pseudo-normal state effect process (S4131) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the above-described pseudo normal state effect process (S4131). In this pseudo normal state effect process (S4131), first, it is determined whether or not the pseudo normal state flag 223s is on (S4901). If it is determined that the pseudo normal state flag 223s is off (S4901: No), This means that the pseudo normal game state is not set (it is not a jackpot standby state based on the left trigger jackpot), and thus this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that the pseudo normal state flag 223s is on (S4901: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a pseudo variable display effect is being executed (S4902). . More specifically, it is determined whether the value of the pseudo-variation timer 223t is 1 or more. If it is determined in the process of S4902 that the pseudo variation display effect is being executed (the value of the pseudo variation timer 223t is 1 or more) (S4902: Yes), the value of the pseudo variation timer 223t is set to 1. It is updated by subtraction (S4903), and it is determined whether the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223t after subtraction has become 0 (S4904). That is, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the pseudo variation display has ended.

  In the process of S4904, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo-fluctuation timer 223t is not 0 (S4904: No), this process is ended as it is to continue the pseudo-variation display. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo-fluctuating timer 223t has become 0 (S4904: Yes), then whether the value of the pseudo-reserved ball number counter 223r is 0 (the pseudo corresponding to the first special symbol) Whether the number of the reserved balls and the number of the pseudo reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol are both 0) (S4905), and if the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r is determined to be 0 ( S4905: Yes), since the pseudo variation display cannot be started, in order to shift to the pseudo variation stop state, 3000 is set as the value of the pseudo variation stop state timer 223u (S4906), and this processing Exit. Since the pseudo normal state effect process (see FIG. 96) is a process executed every millisecond in the main process 7 (see FIG. 95), 3000 is set as the timer value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u. By setting, the timer value becomes 0 when 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds) have elapsed. As a result, it is possible to accurately measure 3 seconds after the pseudo fluctuation stop state.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4905, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo-pending ball number counter 223r is not 0 (S4905: No), the pseudo-variable display start is newly set and the pseudo-variable timer is set. 2000 (timer value corresponding to 2 seconds) is set to the value of 223t (S4907). Next, the value of the pseudo hold ball number counter 223r is decremented by 1, and the display mode is updated according to the pseudo hold ball number after the subtraction (S4908), and this process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S4902 that the pseudo change display is not being executed (S4902: No), it means that the present state is a pseudo change stop state, and therefore the pseudo change stop state timer 223u. 1 is subtracted (S4909), and it is determined whether the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u after the subtraction has become 0 (S4910). In the process of S4910, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u is not 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S4910: No), in order to continue the pseudo fluctuation stop state, This process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4910, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u after subtraction has become 0 (S4910: Yes), a standby state effect (FIG. 7) is set by setting a display standby state command. Execution) is set (S4911). Next, the standby state effect flag 223g is set to ON, and the pseudo normal state flag 223s is set to OFF (S4912), and this process ends.

  By executing this pseudo-normal state effect process (see FIG. 96), it is as if the normal gaming state continues for the player in the jackpot standby state that has been shifted based on winning the left opportunity jackpot. It is possible to execute an effect in a manner reminiscent. Thus, when the left trigger big hit becomes a big hit standby state, the player can be left-handed, so the left opportunity can be reached soon without thinking of reaching the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. The first round of jackpots can be started.

  In the seventh embodiment, the pseudo-variable display is executed for the number of held balls that are held at the start of the jackpot standby state (at the end of the change), and after the jackpot standby state is entered. When a ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is detected, the pseudo-reserved ball number corresponding to the ball is not increased. This is because, as described above, the game board 13 is configured to make it easier for the game ball to enter the left operation winning opening 662 than the first entrance 64 when left-handed. When the player continuously makes a left turn during the jackpot waiting state, there is a very high possibility that the game ball will continuously enter the first entrance 64 without winning the left operation entrance 662. This is because it is low. Therefore, since the process for increasing the number of reserved balls can be omitted, the processing load on the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, if the processing for increasing the number of held balls is also performed, the number of held balls is already detected when the main controller 110 detects a ball entering the first ball inlet 64 during the big hit waiting state. Even if the upper limit has been reached, it is necessary to notify the sound lamp control device 113 that the ball has been entered. In the state where the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit, when a transition to the jackpot standby state is performed, and a ball entering the first ball slot 64 is detected after the pseudo variable display effect is executed one or more times, This is because it is necessary to increase the number of reserved balls. For this reason, since commands to be output from the main control device 110 increase, the processing load of the main control device 110 also increases. On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, since the pseudo number of reserved balls is not increased, there is no need to newly increase the command in the main controller 110, and the processing load on the main controller 110 is reduced. be able to. In addition, if the player has fortunately entered the first entrance 64 and the player recognizes that the number of reserved balls does not increase, the player is informed that the player has actually been in a jackpot waiting state. Can understand. Therefore, the player who has luckily detected the big hit waiting state is allowed to play the game by devising to let the game ball reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 and then enter the left operation winning opening 662. Can do. Thereby, in order to determine whether it is a normal gaming state or a jackpot waiting state, it is possible to make the left strike more positively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the winning association process 7 (S4341) in the seventh embodiment will be described. This hit related process 7 (S4341) is a process executed in place of the hit related process 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, and similar to the hit related process 2 (see FIG. 61) This is processing for performing control according to the command when the command to be received is received.

  Among the hit-related processes 7 (see FIG. 97) in the seventh embodiment, in the processes of S4401, S4404, and S4407 to S4410, S4401, S4404 of the hit-related processes 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, respectively. , And the same processes as S4407 to S4410 are executed. In the hit association process 7 (see FIG. 97) in the seventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4401 that a standby state command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4401: Yes), the standby state command process Instead of (see FIG. 62), the standby state command process 7 is executed (S4441), and this process ends. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 98, this standby state command process 7 (S4441) is a process for setting an effect mode corresponding to the jackpot type as the jackpot standby state.

  In the winning association process 7 (see FIG. 97) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4404 that an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4404: Yes), a big hit is started. An opening command process for executing the opening effect according to the situation is executed (S4442), and this process ends. Details of the opening command process (S4442) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the details of the above-described standby state command process 7 (S4441) will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the standby state command process 7 (S4441). Of the standby state command processing 7 (S4441), in S4601 to S4603, the same processing as S4601 to S4603 of the standby state command processing (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment is executed. .

  In the standby state command process 7 (see FIG. 98) in the seventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4601 that the current jackpot is not the right trigger jackpot (the left trigger jackpot) (S4601: No) ), The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are read (S4611), and it is determined whether or not the read counter values are both 0 (S4612). .

  In the process of S4612, if it is determined that the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are both 0 (S4612: Yes), the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is If it is 0 and the pseudo variation display is started, the player will feel uncomfortable, so a pseudo variation stop state is set. That is, 3000 (timer value corresponding to 3 seconds) is set as the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u (S4613), and the process proceeds to S4617.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4612, when it is determined that at least one of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is not 0 (S4612: No), the reading is performed. The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are stored as the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r (S4614), and the start of pseudo variation display is set. Then, 2000 (timer value corresponding to 2 seconds) is set as the value of the pseudo-fluctuating timer 223t (S4615). Then, the value of the pseudo-reserved ball number counter 223r is updated by subtracting one, and the retained ball number symbol is displayed in a pseudo-decrease state by one (S4616), and the process proceeds to S4617. In the process of S4617, the pseudo normal state flag 223s is set to ON (S4617), and this process ends.

  By executing this standby state command processing 7 (see FIG. 98), in the jackpot standby state corresponding to the left trigger jackpot, an effect as if the normal gaming state continues can be executed in a pseudo manner. When the right opportunity jackpot is reached, the standby state effect can be executed. As a result, when the left opportunity big hit is made, it is possible to continue the left strike without notifying the player that the player has been in the big hit standby state, so that the game ball reaches the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. Soon it will be possible to start winning the jackpot by winning the left working winning opening 662. On the other hand, when the right opportunity big hit, the player can easily understand that the big hit waiting state has been reached, so the first round according to the timing of winning the game ball to the right operation port 661. Can be provided with a variable degree of advantage (the number of game balls that can be entered into the right specific winning opening 65a). Therefore, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of launching the game ball in a timely manner.

  Next, the details of the above-described opening command process (S4442) will be described with reference to FIG. In this opening command process (S4442), first, it is determined whether or not the pseudo normal state flag 223s is on (S5001). In the process of S5001, when it is determined that the pseudo normal state flag 223s is on (S5001: Yes), the left operation winning opening is displayed while the pseudo variation display effect or the pseudo variation stop state is displayed. Since it means that the player has entered the ball 662 and the jackpot opening period has started, a display opening command corresponding to the blackout effect (see FIG. 93A) is set (S5002).

  Next, the value of the pseudo-pending ball number counter 223r, the value of the pseudo-fluctuating timer 223t, and the value of the pseudo-fluctuation stop state timer 223u are all reset to 0 (S5003), and the pseudo normal state flag 223s is set to OFF. (S5004), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5001 that the pseudo normal state flag 223s is off (S5001: No), a display opening command corresponding to the normal opening effect is set (S5005), and the standby state effect flag 223g is set. Is set to OFF (S5006), and this process ends.

  By executing this opening command processing (see FIG. 99), when the game ball is won to the left operation winning opening 662 and the opening period is started in the jackpot waiting state that has been won and shifted to the left opportunity jackpot Suddenly, a blackout effect in which the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is darkened (blackout) can be executed. In other words, it can be set in a mode that is greatly different from the pseudo variation display or pseudo variation stop state effect that has been executed so far. Thereby, it can be made to understand that the special production was performed instantly with respect to the player.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment, the left triggering jackpot start opportunity is set at a position where a part of the game balls launched aiming at the first entrance 64 can enter the left. The operation winning opening 662 is arranged. And when it is left big opportunity big hit, it was set as the structure by which the effect that the 3rd symbol of a combination of stoppage was stopped and displayed as an effect of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 during the change display of a special symbol was performed. Further, in the jackpot standby state that shifts after the end of the change, the effect is performed as if the normal gaming state continues. That is, during the jackpot waiting state, a pseudo normal state effect such as a pseudo variable display effect is executed, and the player is mistaken as if in a normal game state, and left-handed is continued. Is configured to be possible. Thereby, when the left opportunity jackpot is won and the jackpot is in a standby state, the player can be left-handed (the player can be prevented from making a right-hand hit), so the open / close door 65f1 The player can enter the game ball into the left operation winning opening 662 without the player being aware of the game ball reaching the upper surface of the player. Therefore, when the left opportunity hit is a big hit, it is difficult to start the big hit after the number of game balls exceeding the specified number (two, which is the upper limit number of the first round) reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. On the other hand, when a big hit is made on the right side, it is easily overrun by entering the game ball into the right action winning opening 661 at the timing when many game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Wins can be generated. Therefore, since the degree of advantage (the number of winning balls that can be obtained) in the first round can be made different between the left opportunity jackpot and the right opportunity jackpot, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the jackpot type.

  In the seventh embodiment, the pseudo-normal state effect is always executed when the jackpot standby state corresponding to the left trigger jackpot is entered. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine by lottery whether to execute the pseudo normal state effect or the standby state effect when the left opportunity big hit.

  In the seventh embodiment, the pseudo variation display is executed for the number of the balls that are held at the start of the jackpot standby state (at the end of the variation). When the entrance to the 1 entrance 64 is detected, the pseudo-reserved number of balls corresponding to the entrance is not increased. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which increases a reserve ball number symbol pseudo | simulated every time a start win is detected. Thereby, it can be made harder for a player to recognize whether or not the pseudo-normal state effect is being executed.

  In the seventh embodiment, the execution start timing of the expectation notification effect is fixed for each variation type. That is, in the case of a hit or miss special reach, the execution of the expectation notification effect is started at the timing when 86 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and in the case of a hit or miss super reach, the timing at which 56 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if it is the same variation type, it is good also as a structure which varies the execution start timing of an anticipation notification effect by lottery etc.

  In the seventh embodiment, the pseudo-variable display is configured to execute a special effect for 2 seconds that is different from normal, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the same variation time as that of normal variation display and the variation display effect of the display mode may be executed in a pseudo manner. More specifically, for example, it is possible to repeat the variable display that was executed immediately before the big hit standby state. By configuring in this way, it is only necessary to use the data of the fluctuation display used immediately before as it is, so that the processing load when executing the pseudo fluctuation display can be reduced.

  In the seventh embodiment, when the left trigger jackpot and the game shifts to the jackpot standby state, the pseudo-variable display corresponding to the number of balls held at that time is executed, and then the pseudo stop display state is set. Although it was set as the structure to transfer, it is not restricted to this. For example, it may be configured to immediately shift to the stop display state regardless of the number of reserved balls when shifting to the jackpot standby state. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of reserved balls is set to zero artificially when shifting to the jackpot standby state or during the variable display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player feel as if the number of holding balls has been reduced to 0 when the game shifts to the jackpot standby state. It is possible to cause the player to make a left strike in an attempt to execute.

  In the seventh embodiment, when the pseudo variation display is executed, the variation display is performed using the same large three-pattern image as the normal variation display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, it is good also as a structure which prepares the symbol from which a mode differs from a normal 3rd symbol as a symbol only for pseudo variable display.

  The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be done.

  For example, in the first to fourth embodiments and the seventh embodiment described above, one or a plurality of operation winning openings serving as jackpot start triggers when a game ball enters are provided, but the jackpot start trigger is It is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which operation means such as a switch is provided within the reach of a player's hand, and a big hit is started when a specific operation is performed on the operation means after a big win in a special symbol lottery It is good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily start the big hit, so that the player is discouraged by not having entered the operation winning opening even though the game ball was launched aiming at the operation winning opening. Can be prevented.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the right variable winning device 65 is provided as a configuration for giving a prize ball by entering a game ball in the case of a big win or a small win, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, it may be configured to be used for a type of gaming machine (so-called “two types” and “one type of two types”) in which a big hit is started when a game ball enters a specific area inside the right variable winning device 65. With this configuration, the more game balls passing through the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1, the more game balls that enter the right specific winning opening 65a, so that the game balls enter the specific area. It can be thought that it is easy. Therefore, the player can determine the degree of expectation that is a big hit from the number of game balls on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1.

  In the said 1st-4th embodiment and 7th Embodiment, it is set as the structure which provides two types of specific prize winning holes (right specific prize winning opening 65a, left specific winning prize opening 650a) from which closing conditions differ, according to the number of rounds, etc. Although it was set as the structure which switches the classification of the specific winning opening opened, it is not restricted to this. Only the right specific winning opening 65a may be provided, and the number of rounds may be determined and the closing condition (maximum winning number) may be switched. By configuring in this way, the left variable winning device 650 can be deleted, so the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of parts.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, and the seventh embodiment, the game ball is fired at the maximum firing strength (launch speed), so that the action winning opening (the action winning opening 660 in the first to third embodiments, In the fourth embodiment, it is configured such that a game ball can always enter the right operation winning port 661 and the left operation winning port 662), and it is determined that the ball entering the operation winning port is valid only during the big hit waiting state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the big hit waiting state, it may be configured such that it is impossible to physically enter the winning prize opening. Specifically, for example, an electric combination that can close the operation winning opening channel is provided, and the electric combination is only performed until the game ball enters the operation winning opening after the big hit waiting state. It is good also as a structure which opens an object. Even when configured in this way, the jackpot can be started based on the detection of the ball entering the operation winning opening in the jackpot standby state.

  In each of the above embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 controls the start timing of the production mode such as the standby state production and the right-handed expectation level suggestion production, the update process of the mode, etc. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the main control device 110 and the display control device 114 may be configured to perform control related to the rendering mode. Thereby, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 114 can be reduced. In this case, the passage detection sensor 228 may be electrically connected to the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Thereby, even if control regarding the production mode is transplanted to another control device, it is possible to accurately update the mode of the chance meter CM, the mode of the physical strength gauge LG, and the like.

  In the first to fourth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, the passage detection sensor 228 for detecting the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 during execution of the standby state effect is provided. Although the configuration is such that the player can grasp the number of game balls on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 by changing the mode of the chance meter CM in accordance with the detection result, this is not restrictive. For example, a known photographing means (for example, a video camera) for photographing the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 is provided, and photographing is performed on at least a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit waiting state. A configuration may be adopted in which an image or video captured by the means is displayed. Thereby, a player can be made to grasp | ascertain the condition in the upper surface of the opening-and-closing door 65f1 more correctly.

  In each of the above embodiments, by forming a zigzag flow path in which the traveling direction of the game ball can be changed a plurality of times on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1, when the game ball is continuously hit right, The number of game balls exceeding the upper limit number of winnings in the round can be made to flow down the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of forming a folded flow path on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1, simply widen the open / close door 65f1 (and the right specific winning opening 65a) and a game ball passes over the open / close door 65f1. By increasing the distance, a configuration may be adopted in which a number of game balls exceeding the upper limit number of winnings in the first round can flow down simultaneously. In this case, the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the same time when the player continues to make a right strike may not exceed the upper limit winning number in the first round. For example, the width (path length) of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 may be configured to be longer than the length obtained by multiplying the diameter of the game ball by the upper limit number of winnings in the first round. With this configuration, for example, when a ball clogging occurs, and the game ball on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 cannot flow down below the game board 13, the first round of the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 by the right strike The game balls of the upper limit number or more can be made to enter at the same time in the first round when the next big hit is reached by simply reaching the game balls of the upper limit number or more in advance. In addition, it is good also as a structure which provides the shielding member etc. which prevent the game ball which reached | attained the upper surface of the opening-and-closing door 65f1 at the normal time from flowing down below the game board 13. That is, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 may be stopped on the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1 until a big hit is achieved. When configured in this way, it is possible to easily over-win when the next big hit is made by simply hitting the game ball right before the big hit.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right, a three-time right, etc.) that increases the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, twice or three times). May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a game ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a game ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of game balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, the variation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or When a predetermined time elapses, the change of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of game balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only gaming balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as a burden on equipment due to separate handling of a medal and a game ball and restrictions on a place where a game machine is installed can be solved.

  Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof. For example, the configuration of the passage detection sensor 228 of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment may be applied to other embodiments. For example, by applying to the first embodiment, the gauge number of the chance meter CM during execution of the standby state effect can be accurately linked by the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1. More specifically, the passage number counter 223k in the sixth embodiment is also provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, and the value of the passage number counter 223k is updated by the same method as in the fourth embodiment (FIG. 87). (See S4211, S4212, S4219, and S4220). During execution of the standby state effect, every time the value of the passing number counter 223k is updated, the mode of the chance meter CM is updated so that the gauge number corresponding to the updated counter value is obtained. Thereby, the aspect of chance meter CM can be made into the aspect according to the condition of the upper surface of actual opening-and-closing door 65f1. For the other embodiments, the configuration of the sixth embodiment can be diverted by the same method.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (configuration in which over-winning is easily generated intentionally)
A specific area in which a game ball can enter, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the specific area, a specific flow path in which the game ball can flow down, and its specification A game ball that is flowing through at least a predetermined section of the flow path passes through the predetermined section rather than being guided to the specific area, and a first position where it is easier to be guided to the specific area than to pass through the predetermined section. When the variable means that can be easily changed to the second position, the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation content for the operation means become the first operation content, the game ball is moved to the specific flow path. When a game ball is fired at a first firing speed that makes it easy to reach and the second operation content is different from the first operation content, a second launch that is different from the first firing speed A launching means capable of launching a game ball at a speed, and A discriminating means for discriminating whether or not a specific condition that is easier to be satisfied is satisfied when the game ball is launched at the second firing speed by the launching means than when the game ball is launched at the first firing speed; Variable control means for controlling the variable means to change from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied by the means. A gaming machine A1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball at a start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits with different numbers of rounds, and there are some that aim to improve the fun of hitting by changing the game value that can be acquired (for example, No. 2514417).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the game value that can be acquired is almost constant for each hit type, so it becomes like work to obtain a game value according to the hit type, and the game in the hit state Sometimes became monotonous. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, there are some conventional gaming machines that allow the player to determine the start timing of the winning state when winning, but the game value that can be acquired during hitting is almost constant for each hit type Since it is the same as that of other conventional game machines, it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the hit state.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, based on the fact that the game ball has entered a specific area where the game ball can enter, a predetermined privilege is provided by the privilege providing means. A first position where a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a specific flow path in which a game ball can flow is more easily guided to a specific area than passing through the predetermined section, and a predetermined section than being guided to the specific area The variable means is configured to be variable to the second position where it is easy to pass through. When the operation content for the operation means that can be operated by the player becomes the first operation content, the game ball is fired by the launching means at the first firing speed at which the game ball easily reaches the specific flow path. . On the other hand, when the second operation content is different from the first operation content, the game ball is launched by the launching means at a second launch speed different from the first launch speed. When the game ball is fired at the second firing speed by the launching means, it is judged by the judging means whether a specific condition that is easier to be satisfied than when the game ball is fired at the first firing speed is satisfied. Based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied, the variable control means is controlled by the variable control means so that the variable means changes from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period.

  Thereby, the operation means can be operated in expectation that the specific condition is satisfied while the game ball is passing through the predetermined section, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the variable control means may change the variable means from the first position to the second position based on the first number of game balls entering the specific area. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls larger than the first number to flow simultaneously in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position. A gaming machine A2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the variable control means is controlled by the variable control means so that the variable means changes from the first position to the second position based on the first number of game balls entering the specific area. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls larger than the first number to flow down simultaneously in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position.

  As a result, the operation means can be operated by devising the specific condition to be satisfied after the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is an effect that can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A2, the launching means is capable of launching a game ball at a time interval equal to or greater than a predetermined interval, and the game ball is continuously launched at the predetermined interval in the second section. The second number of game balls arrives at the predetermined section after the game ball reaches the predetermined section until the game ball passes through the predetermined section. A gaming machine A3 that allows a game ball to pass therethrough.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, the launching unit is configured to be able to launch the game ball at a time interval equal to or greater than a predetermined interval. The predetermined section is in a state in which game balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals in the second direction until one game ball reaches the predetermined section until the game ball passes the predetermined section. In the meantime, the game balls pass so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to continuously fire the game balls at predetermined intervals to a player who wants to make the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section more than the first number.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the variable means is configured to be able to guide all game balls flowing down the predetermined section to the specific area when being changed to the first position. A gaming machine A4 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the game machine A4 is changed to the first position, all the game balls flowing down the predetermined section are guided to the specific area. Since the variable means is configured, it is possible to know the number of game balls guided to a specific area when a specific condition is satisfied by checking the number of game balls passing through a predetermined section. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily understand the degree of advantage when the specific condition is satisfied.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, there is provided a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and the discrimination means discriminates that the specific condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the ball entrance means. A gaming machine A5, which is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, when the game ball enters a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a specific condition is established by the discrimination means Therefore, there is an effect that the specific condition can be easily established at the player's favorite timing by launching the game ball aiming at the ball entry means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the gaming machine A6 is provided with a decelerating means for decelerating the flowing speed of the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined section.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the flow speed of the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined section is reduced by the speed reducing means, so that the gaming ball is moved toward the specific flow path. When fired continuously, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can be guided to the specific area when the specific condition is satisfied.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a display means capable of displaying an effect mode, an advantage determining means for determining the degree of advantage when the specific condition is satisfied until the specific condition is satisfied, and A gaming machine A7, comprising: a suggestion effect executing means for executing the suggestion effect indicating the advantage degree determined by the advantage determination means in the display means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the advantage degree when the specific condition is satisfied is determined by the advantage determination means until the specific condition is satisfied, and the advantage is determined. Since the suggestion effect suggesting the degree of advantage discriminated by the discriminating means is executed on the display means by the suggestion effect execution means, by checking the suggestion effect displayed on the display means, the degree of advantage when the specific condition is satisfied It is possible to make it easier to understand.

  In the gaming machine A7, the advantage determining means determines the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section, and the suggestion effect executing means determines the number of game balls determined by the advantage determining means. A gaming machine A8 characterized in that a suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is determined by the advantage determining means. An effect suggesting the number of game balls discriminated by the advantage discriminating means is executed as the suggestive effect by the suggestion effect executing means.

  Thus, by confirming the suggestion effect, there is an effect that the player can easily know the number of game balls entering the specific area when the specific condition is satisfied.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, a specific lottery result is obtained by a lottery means that allows a game ball to enter, a lottery means that executes a lottery based on establishment of the lottery conditions, and a lottery by the lottery means And an effective state setting means for setting an effective state for validating the entrance to the entrance means, and the determining means is configured such that the game ball is input to the entrance means during the effective state. The variable control means determines that the specific condition is satisfied when the ball enters, and the variable control means determines that the variable means is the second based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the determination means. A gaming machine A9 that executes a variable game that is varied a predetermined number of times from a position to the first position.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the following effects are produced. In other words, a lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and based on the fact that the lottery means the lottery results in a specific lottery, the entry to the entry means into which the game ball can enter is valid. The valid state is set by the valid state setting means. When the ball enters the ball entry means during the valid state, the determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied. Based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the determination means, a variable game in which the variable means is changed a predetermined number of times from the second position to the first position is executed by the variable control means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that a game can be performed in expectation that a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means.

  In the gaming machine A9, there are a plurality of at least a first operation position at which a game ball can easily enter the entrance means and a second operation position at which entry of the game ball is more difficult than the first operation position. A gaming machine A10 comprising: operating means operable at an operating position; and operating control means for operating the operating position of the operating means to a corresponding operating position according to an elapsed time.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A9, the following effects are achieved. That is, it moves to a plurality of operation positions including at least a first operation position where a game ball can easily enter the entry means and a second operation position where entry of the game ball is more difficult than the first operation position. The means is configured to be operable. The movement position of the movement means is moved to the movement position corresponding to the elapsed time by the movement control means.

  Thereby, in order to satisfy the specific condition, it is necessary to launch the game ball toward the entrance means aiming at the timing when the operation position of the operation means becomes the first operation position. There is an effect that it is possible to give the player fun to make.

<Characteristic B group> (A jackpot that can aim for over-winning and a jackpot that cannot be targeted)
Variable entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which entry of the game ball is more difficult than the first state, and a game ball to the variable entry means Based on the fact that a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means, the determination means for executing the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, A variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable pitching means is changed a predetermined number of times from the second state to the first state, an operation means operable by the player, and The condition determining means for determining whether or not a specific condition that is likely to be satisfied when a specific operation is executed, and the type of variable game executed by the variable game executing means as the type determined by the determining means After a specific discrimination result, A first variable game in which the variable game is started when it is determined by the condition determining means that the specific condition is satisfied; and a second variable game in which the variable game is started regardless of whether the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine B1 comprising: a type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality including at least a game.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball at a start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits that differ in the number of times (number of rounds) of opening of a large opening to which a prize ball is awarded when a game ball wins. There is one that aims to improve interest by making the value different (for example, Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, even if the number of rounds is the same, by changing the opening pattern of the large opening in each round, the number of game balls that can be won in each round is different, Some have a difference in the degree of advantage.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of winning balls that can be obtained is almost constant for each hit type, so it becomes like work for obtaining a game value according to the hit type, There was a case where the game becomes monotonous. Further, since it is necessary to vary the control according to the hit type during the hit state, there is a problem that the processing load during the hit state increases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the variable entry means is varied between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which entry of the game ball is more difficult than the first state. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, the privilege provision means grants a predetermined privilege. Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the determination unit executes the determination, and based on the determination by the determination unit that the specific determination result is obtained, the variable pitching unit is variable a predetermined number of times from the second state to the first state. The variable game to be executed is executed by the variable game execution means. The condition determining means determines whether a specific condition that is easily satisfied when a specific operation is performed on the operation means operable by the player is satisfied. As the type of variable game executed by the variable game execution means, after a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means, the variable game is started when the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied. The type determining means determines one type from among a plurality including at least the first variable game and the second variable game in which the variable game is started regardless of whether or not the specific condition is satisfied.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that the timing at which the variable game is started can be varied depending on the type of the variable game.

  In the gaming machine B1, a launching unit capable of launching a game ball in a direction corresponding to an operation on the operation unit, and a first place where the game ball launched in the first direction by the launching unit is placed at a position where the ball can enter. A ball entry means, a second ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can be entered, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means. A ball entry judging means for judging whether or not the ball has entered, wherein the condition judgment means judges that the specific condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, The second variable game is based on the fact that it is determined that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means by the ball entry discrimination means after the specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. A gaming machine B2 characterized by being started.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B1, the game ball is launched by the launching means in the direction corresponding to the operation on the operation means, and the game ball launched by the launching means in the first direction is entered. The first entrance means is arranged at a possible position. Second entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter. Whether the game ball has entered the second entrance means is discriminated by the entrance discrimination means. When a game ball enters the first ball entry means, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the condition determination means. After a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, the second variable game is started based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means by the ball entry discrimination means.

  Thereby, since the ball entry means which becomes a start condition differs according to the type of the variable game, the game ball can be fired in different directions according to the type of the variable game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player the pleasure of changing the direction in which the game ball is fired.

  In the gaming machine B2, a third entrance means provided at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter, and a first flow path through which the game ball launched in the second direction can flow down. And a variable means capable of a first position capable of holding at least one game ball flowing into the first flow path and a second position where the game ball is less likely to be held than the first position, and Switching means for switching from the first position to the second position on the basis of the fact that the determination means has made a specific determination result in the determination by the determination means, and the determination means includes the third entrance ball A determination is performed based on the game ball entering the means, and the second ball entry means is disposed at a position where the game ball that has passed through the first flow path can enter. A gaming machine B3 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the third entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can enter. A first position capable of holding at least one game ball that has flowed into the first flow path where the game ball launched in the second direction can flow down, and a second position where the game ball is less likely to be held than the first position. The variable means is varied depending on the position. The variable means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means based on the result of the determination by the determining means. The discrimination is performed by the discrimination means based on the game ball entering the third entrance means. The second entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball that has passed through the first flow path can enter.

  Thereby, in order to execute the discrimination by the discriminating means, it is necessary to fire the game ball in the second direction, so that the game ball flows into the first flow path until a specific discrimination result is obtained. Can do. Therefore, when the second variable game is determined by the type determining means, the game ball held in the first flow path can be immediately entered into the second entering means. Therefore, when the second variable game is determined, there is an effect that the second variable game can be started without the player firing a game ball.

  In the gaming machine B3, the second ball entry means is a game ball that is launched in the first direction during a period until the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path enters the second ball entry means. Is arranged at a position that is shorter than a period until the ball enters the variable ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B3, the gaming ball that has been launched in the first direction during the period until the gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path enters the second entering means Since the second pitching means is arranged at a position that is shorter than the period until the ball enters the variable pitching means, when the second variable game is determined, the variable game is immediately started. There is an effect that can be.

  Any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4 includes a specific flow path through which the game balls launched in the first direction can flow down, and the first state is a game ball that is flowing down at least in a predetermined section of the specific flow path However, it is easier to be guided to the variable pitching means than to pass through the predetermined section. In the second state, the game ball flowing down the predetermined section is guided to the variable pitching means. A gaming machine B5, which is in a state where it is easier to pass through the predetermined section.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the first state is reached, the game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in the specific flow path in which the game balls launched in the first direction can flow down is guided to the variable entry means rather than passing through the predetermined section. On the other hand, in the second state, it becomes easier for the game ball flowing down the predetermined section to pass through the predetermined section than being guided to the variable milk ball means.

  As a result, the more game balls passing through the predetermined section at the time of entering the first ball entry means, the more game balls can be guided to the variable grade entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property in which a game ball is launched in a direction.

  In the gaming machine B5, the variable game execution means has a first number of games to the variable pitching means when the variable pitching means is first changed to the first state in one variable game. The variable entry means is controlled to change to the second position based on the ball entering, and the variable entry means is changed to the second position during the predetermined section. In this state, the gaming machine B6 is configured to have a path length that allows a second number of gaming balls larger than the first number to flow down simultaneously.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the fact that the first number of game balls have entered the variable ball entry means when the variable ball entry means is first changed to the first state in one variable game, the variable ball entry means. Is controlled by the variable game execution means so as to change to the second position. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls larger than the first number to flow simultaneously in a state where the variable pitching means is changed to the second position.

  As a result, the operation means can be operated by devising the specific condition to be satisfied after the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is an effect that can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B6, the launching means is capable of launching a game ball at a time interval equal to or greater than a predetermined interval, and the game ball is continuously fired at the predetermined interval in the second section. The second number of game balls arrives at the predetermined section after the game ball reaches the predetermined section until the game ball passes through the predetermined section. A gaming machine B7 that allows a game ball to pass therethrough as possible.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B6, the launching means is configured to be able to launch the game ball at a time interval equal to or greater than a predetermined interval. In a state in which game balls are continuously fired in the second direction at predetermined intervals, the first game ball arrives at a predetermined interval until the game ball passes through the predetermined interval. The predetermined section is configured such that the game balls pass so that two game balls can reach the predetermined section.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to continuously fire the game balls at predetermined intervals to a player who wants to make the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section more than the first number.

  In any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the gaming machine B8 is provided with a decelerating means for decelerating the flowing speed of the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined section.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the flow speed of the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined section is reduced by the speed reducing means, so that the gaming ball is moved toward the specific flow path. When fired continuously, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of game balls guided to the variable ball entry means when a game ball enters the first ball entry means.

  In any of the gaming machines B5 to B8, display means capable of displaying the effect mode, number discrimination means for discriminating the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section, and game balls discriminated by the number discrimination means And a suggestion effect executing means for executing the suggestion effect suggesting the number of the game machines in the display means.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B5 to B8, the following effects are produced. In other words, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is determined by the number determination means, and a suggestion effect that suggests the number of game balls determined by the number determination means is executed by the suggestion effect execution means on the display means. .

  Thus, by confirming the suggestion effect, when the game ball enters the first entrance means, the player can easily know the number of game balls that are guided to the variable entrance means. There is.

  In the gaming machine B9, during execution of the suggestion effect, whether the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion effect and the number of game balls determined by the number determination means are different for each predetermined period. The discriminating means for discriminating and the discriminating means for discriminating determined that the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion effect is different from the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means. And a suggestion effect update means for updating the mode of the suggestion effect to a mode that suggests the number of game balls determined by the number determination means.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B9, the following effects are produced. That is, during execution of the suggestion effect, whether the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion effect is different from the number of game balls determined by the number determination means is determined every predetermined period by the difference determination means. The Based on the fact that the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion effect and the number of game balls determined by the number determination means are determined to be different by the difference determination means, The suggestion effect updating unit updates the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating unit.

  As a result, the mode of the suggestive effect can be updated corresponding to the number determined by the number determining means every predetermined period, so that when the first entering means is entered, it is guided to the variable entering means. There is an effect that the player can more easily know the number of game balls to be played.

  In the gaming machine B2, a third ball entry means that is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter, and the determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering, and a production mode Display means capable of displaying, a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect based on execution of the determination by the determining means in the display means, and the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. As an effect mode, when the determination result is determined by the determination unit and the first variable game is determined by the type determination unit, the first mode is determined, and the determination unit determines When the determination result is different from the specific determination result, and the specific determination result is determined by the determination by the determination unit, and the second variable game is determined by the type determination unit. Gaming machine B11 that if it is, and said the first aspect in which and a demonstration mode determining means capable of determining a different second aspect.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the following effects are produced. In other words, a third ball entry means is provided in which a determination condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter. In the display means capable of displaying the effect mode, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means based on the determination made by the determining means. As an effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means, when the determination result is determined by the determination means, and the first variable game is determined by the type determination means, the effect mode determination means determines the first mode. Is determined. On the other hand, when the discriminating means results in an outlier discriminating result different from the specific discriminating result, and when the discriminating means produces a specific discriminating result and the second variable game is determined by the type determining means A second mode different from the first mode is determined as a specific mode of effect by the mode of effect determining unit.

  Thereby, when the second variable game is determined, it is possible to make the player think as if a specific determination result is not obtained. Therefore, even after the specific effect of the second mode is executed, the game ball can be continuously fired in the second direction in order to make the determination by the determination means, so that it is noticed that the specific determination result is obtained. The game ball can be entered into the second entry means before long. Therefore, the player can be given an impression as if the second variable game was suddenly started, so that the player can be surprised and delighted.

  In the gaming machine B11, the specific effect of the second aspect executed based on the determination result by the determination means and the specific determination result being executed by the type determination means being determined by the type determination means. A pseudo-specific effect capable of executing a pseudo-specific effect in an aspect that is difficult to distinguish from the specific effect of the second aspect in a period from when the game ball enters the second ball entry means until the game is entered. A gaming machine B12 comprising an execution means.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B11, a second determination is made based on the determination by the determination means, and the second variable game executed based on the determination of the second variable game by the type determination means. Execution of the pseudo-specific effect in a mode that is difficult to distinguish from the specific effect of the second mode during the period from the end of the specific effect of the mode until the game ball enters the second entrance means Since it is executed by the means, when the second variable game is determined by the type determining means, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that a specific determination result has been obtained.

  In the gaming machine B12, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means, an acquisition means for obtaining discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and the discrimination information obtained by the acquisition means Discrimination information storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information, an erasure means for erasing the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means from the discrimination information storage means, and stored in the discrimination information storage means An information count image display means for displaying on the display means an information count image that indicates the number of information of the discrimination information, and the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the second determination by the type determination means. A period from the end of the specific effect of the second mode executed based on the determination of the variable game until the game ball enters the second ball entry means Oite, the pseudo each time specific effect is executed, the information number of images, a game machine B13 number information is characterized by comprising an image updating means for updating the image corresponding to the number of one less information.

  According to the gaming machine B13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B12, the following effects are produced. That is, discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the acquisition means based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. The discrimination information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the discrimination information storage unit with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. The discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is erased from the discrimination information storage means by the erasure means. An information number image suggesting the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is displayed on the display means by the information count image display means. After the specific effect of the second mode executed based on the determination by the determination means and a specific determination result obtained by the determination of the second variable game by the type determination means ends, the second entry means Each time the pseudo-specific effect is executed, the information number image is updated to an image corresponding to the information number with one less information number by the image updating means during the period until the game ball enters.

  As a result, the information number image is updated by the image updating means, so that it is possible to make the player think as if the number of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is decreasing. Therefore, when the second variable game is determined by the type determining means, the game ball is stored in the second game ball after the specific determination result is given to the player who wants to execute the determination by the determining means without interruption. There is an effect that it can continue to fire in the direction.

<Characteristic C group> (In an advantageous gaming state, over-winning navigation is performed when winning a small hit)
A specific area in which a game ball can enter, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the specific area, a specific flow path in which the game ball can flow down, and its specification A game ball that is flowing through at least a predetermined section of the flow path passes through the predetermined section rather than being guided to the specific area, and a first position where it is easier to be guided to the specific area than to pass through the predetermined section. The variable means that can be easily changed to the second position, the determination means that executes determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the variable means based on the fact that a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means Is variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time, and when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result, the variable means Possible to first position Gaming machine C1, characterized in that it comprises a specific effect execution unit capable of executing the specific effect before being.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional type gaming machine, the display is subjected to a variable display of symbols, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. In addition to the symbols, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device, and a variety of interest effects are executed to improve the interest of the game (for example, JP 2003-325886 A). Publication).

  Further, some of the conventional gaming machines are configured such that an effect suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether or not a winning game that is advantageous to the player will be given can be executed by the effect displayed on the display device. Some have been made.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since it is already determined whether or not an effect that suggests the degree of expectation is started, it is determined whether the effect of the effect itself is the player's advantage. Will not be affected. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to play the game while paying attention to the display device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit based on the game ball entering a specific area where the game ball can enter. A first position where a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a specific flow path in which a game ball can flow is more easily guided to a specific area than passing through the predetermined section, and a predetermined section than being guided to the specific area The variable means is changed to the second position where it is easy to pass through. Based on the establishment of the determination condition, determination is performed by the determination means, and the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the determination result by the determination means. The variable game is executed by the variable game execution means. When the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means before the variable means is changed to the first position.

  Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not it is changed to the first position by confirming whether or not the specific effect has been executed.

  In the gaming machine C1, the specific effect executing means suggests as the specific effect an effect of suggesting a launch timing at which the variable means may be changed to the first position while the game ball passes through the predetermined section. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, as a specific effect, an effect suggesting a launch timing that may cause the variable means to be changed to the first position while the game ball passes through a predetermined section. Is executed by the specific effect execution means, and there is an effect that attention can be drawn by the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the predetermined period is a period from when a game ball is launched in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged until the shot game ball reaches the specific flow path. A gaming machine C3 that is shorter than the period.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the gaming ball that has been fired in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged has been discharged for a predetermined period of time. Since it is configured to be shorter than the period until it reaches the point, it is difficult to acquire a predetermined privilege unless the game ball is fired when the specific effect is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to whether or not the specific effect is executed for the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the variable means moves from the second position to the first position based on the fact that the determination by the determination means results in a second determination result different from the specific determination result. A second variable game execution means for executing a second variable game that is variable a specific number of times, and the period during which the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position in the second variable game, A gaming machine C4 that is likely to be longer than the predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are produced. That is, the second variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position a specific number of times based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means has a second determination result different from the specific determination result. It is executed by two variable game execution means. In the second variable game, the period during which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position is configured to be longer than the predetermined period.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the game can be performed in anticipation that the second variable game is executed.

  In the gaming machine C4, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating the determination result of determination by the determination means, and movement of the identification information by the dynamic display execution means as the variable game type The first variable game in which the period until the variable means is changed to the first position after the completion of the target display is set to the first period, and the variable after the dynamic display of the identification information ends. A variable game type is determined from among a plurality of second variable games including at least a second variable game set in a second period shorter than the first period until the means is changed to the first position. Type suggesting means, and the suggestion effect executing means between the end of the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display executing means and the time when the variable means is changed to the first position. To perform the suggestion Game machine C5 characterized by Rukoto.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced. That is, the dynamic display execution unit executes dynamic display of identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination unit. As a variable game type, a first variable game in which a period from when the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display executing means is finished until the variable means is changed to the first position is set as the first period; A plurality of mediums including at least a second variable game in which the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information until the variable means is changed to the first position is set to a second period shorter than the first period To 1 variable game type is determined by the type determining means. The suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means after the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution means is finished and before the variable means is changed to the first position.

  As a result, the player who has determined the first variable game can have more game balls reach the predetermined section than the second variable game. There is an effect that it can be done.

  In the gaming machine C5, the first period is a period from when a game ball is fired in the direction in which the specific flow path is disposed until the fired game ball reaches the specific flow path. The second period is a period from when the game ball is launched in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged until the shot game ball reaches the specific flow path. A gaming machine C6, characterized in that the period is shorter than the period.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the following effects are produced. That is, after the game ball is launched in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged, the first period is configured with a period longer than the period until the fired game ball reaches the specific flow path. Has been. On the other hand, the second period is configured with a period shorter than the period from when the game ball is launched in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged until the shot game ball reaches the specific flow path. Has been.

  As a result, in the case of the second variable game, it becomes difficult to make the game ball reach the specific flow path, so that the first variable game can be expected to be determined more strongly. There is.

  In the gaming machine C1, the dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determining means, and the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result during the execution of the dynamic display As a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, a first type determination for determining one specific effect from a plurality including at least a first effect and a second effect different from the first effect. And a second specific effect execution for executing the specific effect during execution of the dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination by the determination means and the determination result different from the specific determination result. And a second type for determining one specific effect from a plurality including at least the first effect and the second effect as the type of the specific effect executed by the second specific effect executing means. Decision A stage determined by the first type determining means is higher than a ratio determined by the second type determining means, and the second effect is The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the ratio determined by the first type determining means is lower than the ratio determined by the second type determining means.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are produced. That is, the dynamic display execution unit executes dynamic display of identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination unit. At least a first effect and a second effect different from the first effect are included as a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means during the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result. One specific effect is determined from the plurality by the first type determining means. Based on the determination by the determining means that the discrepancy determination result is different from the specific determination result, the specific effect is executed by the second specific effect executing means during the dynamic display of the identification information. As the type of the specific effect executed by the second specific effect executing means, one specific effect is determined by the second type determining means from among a plurality including at least the first effect and the second effect. The first effect is configured such that the ratio determined by the first type determination means is higher than the ratio determined by the second type determination means. On the other hand, the second effect is configured such that the ratio determined by the second type determining means is higher than the ratio determined by the second type determining means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the degree of expectation that the variable game is executed can be varied according to the content of the specific effect.

  In the gaming machine C7, the specific flow path is arranged during a period from when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is ended until the variable means is changed to the first position. A period from when the game ball is fired in the direction in which the game ball is fired until the fired game ball reaches the specific flow path. A gaming machine C8, which is shorter than a period of time from when a game ball is fired in the direction in which it is placed until the fired game ball reaches the specific flow path.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C7, the following effects are produced. That is, during the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result to the time when the variable means is changed to the first position, the game ball is moved in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged. It is comprised so that it may become shorter than the period from the time of being launched to the time when the game ball that has been launched reaches the specific flow path. The predetermined period is configured to be shorter than a period from when the game ball is launched in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged until the fired game ball reaches the specific flow path. Yes.

  As a result, the game ball cannot reach the predetermined section unless the game ball is fired toward the specific flow path during the dynamic display of the identification information, so that a specific determination result is obtained from the content of the specific effect. It has the effect of making it possible to make a more serious prediction.

  In the gaming machine C7 or C8, the first type determining means is configured to be able to determine a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect at a predetermined ratio, and the second type The game machine C9 is characterized in that the determining means is configured to be unable to determine the third performance.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C7 or C8, the following effects are produced. That is, the first effect and the third effect different from the second effect are determined by the first type determining means at a predetermined rate. The second type determining means is configured to be unable to determine the third effect.

  Thus, when the third effect is executed, it is determined that a specific determination result has been obtained at that time, so that there is an effect that the player can be pleased.

<Characteristic D group> (Variation of the likelihood of over winning by varying the length of the closing period during the jackpot)
A specific area in which a game ball can enter, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the specific area, a specific flow path in which the game ball can flow down, and its specification A game ball that is flowing through at least a predetermined section of the flow path passes through the predetermined section rather than being guided to the specific area, and a first position where it is easier to be guided to the specific area than to pass through the predetermined section. The variable means that can be easily changed to the second position, the determination means that executes the determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the variable means based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result Variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable a predetermined number of times from the second position to the first position, a first control as the control method of the variable means during execution of the variable game, and the variable means Is the first A control method for determining one control method from among a plurality of control methods including at least a second control in which game balls passing through the predetermined section are likely to be larger than the first control at a variable timing. A game machine D1 comprising: a determination unit;

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball at a start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits that differ in the number of times (number of rounds) of opening of a large opening to which a prize ball is awarded when a game ball wins. There is one that aims to improve interest by making the value different (for example, Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, even if the number of rounds is the same, by changing the opening pattern of the large opening in each round, the number of game balls that can be won in each round is different, Some have a difference in the degree of advantage.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of winning balls that can be obtained is almost constant for each hit type, so it becomes like work for obtaining a game value according to the hit type, There was a case where the game becomes monotonous. That is, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting unit based on the game ball entering the specific area where the game ball can enter. A first position at which a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a specific flow path in which a game ball can flow is more easily guided to the specific flow path than passing through the predetermined section, and a predetermined position than being guided to the specific area The variable means is changed to the second position where it is easy to pass through the section. The discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means. The variable game is executed by the variable game execution means. As a control method of the variable means during the execution of the variable game, the first control and the second control in which the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section at the timing when the variable means is changed to the first position are more likely than the first control. The control method determining means determines one control method from among a plurality of control methods including at least

  Thereby, when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means, it is possible to play a game in anticipation that the variable means is controlled by the second control. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1, the second control is a case where at least one period is controlled by the first control among a plurality of periods in which the variable means is changed to the second position in one variable game. A gaming machine D2 that is controlled so as to be longer.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the second control is performed in the first variable game in which at least one period of the plurality of periods during which the variable means is changed to the second position is Since it is comprised so that it may become longer than the case controlled by control, the direction of 2nd control can make more game balls arrive at a predetermined area. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with a strong expectation that the variable means is controlled by the second control.

  The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating a determination result of determination by the determination means, and the first control includes the identification information indicating the specific determination result. The period from the end of the dynamic display until the variable means is changed to the first position is controlled to be the first period, and the second control is the specific determination Control that the period from when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result is finished until the variable means is changed to the first position is a second period longer than the first period. A gaming machine D3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are produced. That is, the dynamic display execution unit executes dynamic display of identification information indicating the determination result of the determination by the determination unit. In the first control, control is performed so that the period from when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is completed until the variable means is changed to the first position is the first period. In the second control, a period between the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result and the change of the variable means to the first position is a second period longer than the first period. Controlled.

  As a result, when the game ball is continuously fired toward the specific flow path after the dynamic display of the identification information is finished, the second control can make more game balls reach the predetermined section. Therefore, when the variable means is changed to the first position, there is an effect that more game balls can enter the specific area.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the variable means is based on the fact that a first number or more of game balls have entered the specific area while the variable means is being changed to the first position. Variable control means for controlling to change to the second position, and the predetermined section has a second number greater than the first number in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position. A gaming machine D4, characterized in that it is configured with a path length through which game balls can flow simultaneously.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are produced. That is, while the variable means is being changed to the first position, the variable means is changed to the second position by the variable control means based on the fact that the first or more number of game balls have entered the specific area. To be controlled. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number or more of game balls larger than the first number to flow simultaneously in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position.

  Accordingly, the game can be performed in the hope that the variable means is changed to the first position after the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number. is there.

  The gaming machine D4 includes operating means that can be operated by the player, and launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area at a time interval greater than or equal to a predetermined interval at a firing speed corresponding to the operation content of the operating means. In the state in which the predetermined section is continuously fired at the predetermined interval in the second direction, after the game ball reaches the predetermined section, the game ball is A gaming machine D5, wherein the game balls are passed so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section before passing through the predetermined section.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D4, the launching means for launching the game ball to the gaming area at a time interval greater than or equal to a predetermined interval at a firing speed according to the operation content of the operating means that can be operated by the player Fired. The predetermined section is in a state in which game balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals in the second direction until one game ball reaches the predetermined section until the game ball passes the predetermined section. In the meantime, the game balls are passed so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to continuously fire the game balls at predetermined intervals to a player who wants to make the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section more than the first number.

  In the gaming machine D5, the second control is performed by the launching means during a specific period which is at least one of a plurality of periods in which the variable means is changed to the second position in one of the variable games. The at least the first number or more of the game balls are controlled so as to be a period of a length that allows the game balls to reach the predetermined section. The gaming machine D6 is controlled so as to have a length of time during which it is difficult to reach the predetermined number or more of the game balls launched by the above-mentioned predetermined section.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the following effects are produced. In other words, in the second control, at least a specific period, which is at least one period among a plurality of periods in which the variable means is changed to the second position in one variable game, is at least the first number or more fired by the launching means. The length is controlled so that the game ball can reach the predetermined section. In the first control, the specific period is controlled so as to be a period in which it is difficult to reach the predetermined number or more of the game balls fired by the launching means.

  Thereby, when the variable means is controlled by the second control, there is an effect that the first or more number of game balls can be made to enter the specific area by continuously firing the game balls during the specific period. .

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the gaming machine D7 is provided with a decelerating means for decelerating the flowing speed of the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined section.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 to D6, the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the predetermined section is reduced by the speed reduction means, so that the game balls are continuously directed toward the specific flow path. When fired, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can be guided to the specific area when the variable means is changed to the first position.

  In the gaming machine D7, the speed reduction means is configured by a zigzag-shaped flow path.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D7, the speed reducing means is formed of a zigzag flow path, so that the direction in which the gaming ball flows down can be changed a plurality of times in a predetermined section. Therefore, there is an effect that the speed of the game ball can be decelerated more reliably.

  In the gaming machine D7, the speed reducing means makes the dynamic frictional force between the gaming ball and the predetermined section higher than other portions in the specific flow path.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D7, the dynamic frictional force between the gaming ball and the predetermined section is made higher than the other parts in the specific flow path by the deceleration means, so that the gaming ball flows down in the predetermined section There is an effect that the speed can be reduced more reliably.

<Characteristic E group> (Direction suggesting the degree of advantage when jackpot is started)
Based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied after the display means capable of displaying the effect mode, the determination means for executing determination based on the determination condition being satisfied, and the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result A bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player, and a case where execution of the bonus game is started in a predetermined period between the specific determination result and the specific condition being satisfied. A gaming machine E1 comprising: a suggestion effect executing means for executing, in the display means, an suggestion effect that suggests a degree of advantage to the player.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional type gaming machine, the display is subjected to a variable display of symbols, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. In addition to the symbols, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device, and a variety of interest effects are executed to improve the interest of the game (for example, JP 2003-325886 A). Publication).

  Further, some of the conventional gaming machines are configured such that an effect suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether or not a winning game that is advantageous to the player will be given can be executed by the effect displayed on the display device. Some have been made.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since it is already determined whether or not an effect that suggests the degree of expectation is started, it is determined whether the effect of the effect itself is the player's advantage. Will not be affected. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to play the game while paying attention to the display device.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the effect mode is displayed on the display means. The discrimination is performed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. After a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means, a special game advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution means based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied. The suggestion effect that suggests to the player the degree of advantage when the execution of the privilege game is started in a predetermined period from when the specific determination result is satisfied until the specific condition is satisfied is displayed by the suggestion effect execution means. Executed in

  Thereby, there is an effect that the game can be performed while paying attention to the suggestion effect.

  In the gaming machine E1, an operation means that can be operated by the player, a launching means that can launch a game ball at a firing speed according to the operation content of the operation means, and a game ball that is launched by the launching means can be entered A game machine E2, wherein the specific condition is established when a game ball enters the ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are produced. That is, a game ball is fired by the launching means at a launching speed corresponding to the operation content of the operating means that can be operated by the player. A specific condition is established when a game ball enters a ball entry means into which a game ball launched by the launch means can enter.

  Thereby, according to the content suggested by the suggestion effect, there is an effect that the timing at which the game ball is fired can be adjusted.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, a specific area in which a game ball can enter, a privilege grant means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the specific area, and the game ball can flow down From the specific flow path, the first position where the game ball flowing down at least the predetermined section in the specific flow path is more easily guided to the specific area than passing through the predetermined section, and being guided to the specific area Variable means that can be changed to a second position that makes it easier to pass through the predetermined section, and the bonus game executing means can change the variable means to the second position based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied. The game machine E3 is characterized in that the game machine E3 is varied a predetermined number of times from the first to the first position.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered a specific area where the game ball can enter, a predetermined privilege is provided by the privilege providing means. A first position at which a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a specific flow path in which a game ball can flow is more easily guided to the specific flow path than passing through the predetermined section, and a predetermined position than being guided to the specific area The variable means is changed to the second position where it is easy to pass through the section. Based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied, the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by the privilege game executing means a predetermined number of times.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that the game can be performed while paying attention to the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section at the timing when the specific condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine E3, during execution of the privilege game, the variable means is based on the fact that the first number of game balls have entered the specific area after the variable means is changed to the first position. Variable control means for controlling the variable position from the first position to the second position is provided, and the predetermined section is larger than the first number when the variable means is changed to the second position. A gaming machine E4, wherein the gaming machine E4 has a path length that allows a second number of gaming balls to flow down simultaneously.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3, the following effects are produced. That is, during execution of the privilege game, the variable means is changed from the first position to the second position based on the fact that the first number of game balls have entered the specific area after the variable means is changed to the first position. It is controlled by variable control means so as to be variable. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls larger than the first number to flow down in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position.

  Thereby, since it can be expected that the specific condition is satisfied after the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. There is an effect.

  The gaming machine E4, comprising: operating means operable by a player; and launching means capable of launching a game ball at a time interval greater than or equal to a predetermined interval at a firing speed corresponding to the operation content of the operating means; In a state where game balls are continuously being fired at the predetermined interval toward the specific flow path, after one game ball reaches the predetermined section, the game ball moves through the predetermined section. The game machine E5 is characterized in that the game balls are passed so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section before passing.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the following effects are produced. That is, a game ball is launched at a time interval greater than or equal to a predetermined interval by the launching means at a launching speed corresponding to the operation content of the operating means that can be operated by the player. The predetermined section is a state in which one game ball reaches the predetermined section in a state where the game balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals toward the specific flow path, and then the game ball passes through the predetermined section. In the meantime, the game balls are caused to flow down so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to continuously fire the game balls at predetermined intervals to a player who wants to make the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section more than the first number.

  In any one of the gaming machines E3 to E5, the game machine includes a number discriminating unit that discriminates the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section, and the suggestion effect executing unit determines the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating unit. A gaming machine E6, wherein a suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E3 to E5, the following effects are produced. That is, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is determined by the number determining means. An effect suggesting the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means is executed as an suggestive effect by the suggesting effect executing means.

  This allows the player to easily understand the number of game balls that are guided to a specific area when a specific condition is met, depending on the contents of the suggestion effect, so that a larger number is specified while being suggested. There is an effect that a game can be performed in expectation that the condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine E6, during execution of the suggestion effect, an effect mode update means for updating the effect mode of the suggestion effect according to the number of game balls determined by the number determination means for each predetermined period, and the effect When updating the effect mode of the suggestion effect by the mode update means, it is determined whether the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion effect matches the number of game balls determined by the number determination means It is determined that the match determination means for determining each period, the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion effect by the match determination means, and the number of game balls determined by the number determination means match. In this case, the game machine E7, comprising: an update avoidance means for avoiding the effect aspect update means from being updated by the effect aspect update means.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E6, the following effects are achieved. That is, during execution of the suggestion effect, the effect mode of the suggestion effect is updated by the effect mode update unit according to the number of game balls determined by the number determination unit for each predetermined period. When the effect mode of the suggestion effect is updated by the effect mode update means, it is determined whether the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion effect matches the number of game balls determined by the number determination means. It is determined every predetermined period by means. When the match determination means determines that the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion effect matches the number of game balls determined by the number determination means, the effect update means updates the effect mode. This is avoided by the update avoidance means.

  Thereby, since the frequency with which an effect aspect is updated can be reduced, there exists an effect that the processing load required for the update of an effect aspect can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E6 or E7, in the predetermined section, a plurality of passage detection means capable of detecting the passage of a game ball are arranged at a plurality of locations, and the number determination means includes the plurality of passage detection means. Among them, the gaming machine E8 is characterized in that the number of the passage detection means detecting passage of the game ball is determined as the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E6 or E7, the following effects are produced. That is, a plurality of passage detection means capable of detecting the passage of the game ball are arranged at a plurality of locations in the predetermined section. Of the plurality of passage detection means, the number of passage detection means detecting passage of the game ball is determined by the number determination means as the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be accurately determined.

<Characteristic F group> (Production indicating the degree of expectation of whether or not it will be advantageous when right-handed)
A ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can enter, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and the discrimination An advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when the game ball is launched in a second direction different from the first direction based on the result of the determination by the means. Display means capable of displaying identification information, dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means in the display means, and the identification by the dynamic display execution means A specific effect that can execute a specific effect that suggests the degree of expectation that an advantageous gaming state will occur when a game ball is launched in the second direction while dynamic display of information is being executed And an execution means. Game machine F1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional type gaming machine, the display is subjected to a variable display of symbols, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. In addition to the symbols, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device, and a variety of interest effects are executed to improve the interest of the game (for example, JP 2003-325886 A). Publication).

  Further, some of the conventional gaming machines are configured such that an effect suggesting the degree of expectation as to whether or not a winning game that is advantageous to the player will be given can be executed by the effect displayed on the display device. Some have been made.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since it is already determined whether or not an effect that suggests the degree of expectation is started, it is determined whether the effect of the effect itself is the player's advantage. Will not be affected. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to play the game while paying attention to the display device.

  According to the gaming machine F1, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means arranged at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter, the discrimination means performs the discrimination. . Based on the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when the game ball is launched in the second direction different from the first direction is determined by the advantageous state setting means. Is set. Dynamic display of the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination unit is executed on the display unit by the dynamic display execution unit. A specific effect that suggests the degree of expectation that an advantageous game state will occur when a game ball is launched in the second direction while dynamic display of identification information is being executed by the dynamic display execution means Is executed by the specific effect executing means.

  This allows the player to determine whether or not it is better to fire the game ball in the second direction according to the suggested content of the specific effect, so that the game can be performed while paying attention to the specific effect. There is.

  In the gaming machine F1, the advantageous state is that when the game ball is started to be fired in the second direction during a specific period during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result, It is more advantageous for the player than starting the launch of the game ball in the second direction after the dynamic display of the identification information indicating a specific determination result is finished, and the specific effect executing means, When executing the specific effect during execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result, the specific effect is executed in an effect period including at least a part of the specific period. A gaming machine F2 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are produced. In other words, when an advantageous state is reached, an identification indicating a specific determination result is obtained when a game ball is launched in the second direction during a specific period during the execution of dynamic display of identification information indicating a specific determination result. It becomes more advantageous for the player than starting firing of the game ball in the second direction after the dynamic display of information is finished. When the specific effect is executed during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means in the effect period including at least a part of the specific period.

  Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to determine whether or not to start firing the game ball in the second direction during the period of the specific effect based on the suggested content of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the suggested content of the specific performance.

  In the gaming machine F2, the advantageous state is that it becomes easier for the player to start firing the game ball in the second direction earlier during the specific period. A gaming machine F3 to play.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, in the advantageous state, it is more advantageous for the player to start firing the game ball in the second direction earlier during a specific period. Therefore, when the specific effect is executed, it is possible to make the player think to determine whether or not to fire the game ball in the second direction as soon as possible. Therefore, there is an effect that a sense of tension can be given by the game during execution of the specific effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, it is determined when dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is executed as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. A first specific effect in which the ratio is increased, and a second specific effect in which the ratio determined when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is being executed is lower than the first specific effect. The game machine F4 is provided with an effect type determination means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is executed as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. The first specific effect in which the ratio to be determined is high, and the second specific effect in which the ratio to be determined is low when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is performed than the first specific effect. From the plurality of types including at least one of the types including the production type determination means, the production type determination means determines whether or not it is the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result from the production type of the specific production. The player can make a guess. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the type of the specific effect and play the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, a special area in which a game ball can enter, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the specific area, the second A specific flow path provided at a position where a game ball launched in a direction can flow in, and a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section of the specific flow path in the specific area rather than passing through the predetermined section. Variable means that can be changed to a first position that is easy to be guided and a second position that is easier to pass through the predetermined section than to be guided to the specific area, and the advantageous state setting means includes the advantageous state setting means. As a state, a control for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position until a specific condition is satisfied is executed one or more times, and the advantageous state is obtained during the specific period. Game ball in the second direction The person who started the firing is more likely to start the game ball in the second direction until the specific condition is satisfied after the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result is finished. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the number of game balls guided to the specific area is likely to increase.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered a specific area where the game ball can enter, a predetermined privilege is provided by the privilege providing means. A game ball that is flowing through at least a predetermined section in a specific flow path provided at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can flow is more easily guided to a specific area than passing through the predetermined section. The variable means is changed to the position and the second position that makes it easier to pass through the predetermined section than being guided to the specific area. As the advantageous state, the control for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position until the specific condition is satisfied is executed one or more times by the advantageous state setting means. In the advantageous state, when the launch of the game ball in the second direction during the specific period is started, the launch of the game ball in the second direction after the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result ends. It is easier to increase the number of game balls that are guided to the specific area before the specific condition is satisfied than when starting the game.

  Thereby, it is possible to make a player who wants to obtain more predetermined benefits more seriously determine whether or not to start launching a game ball in the second direction from the suggested content of the specific effect. effective.

  In the gaming machine F5, the specific condition is satisfied when the number of game balls that have entered the specific area after the variable means is changed to the first position is the first number, The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls larger than the first number to flow at the same time in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position. A gaming machine F6 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5, the following effects are produced. That is, the specific condition is established when the number of game balls that have entered the specific area after the variable means is changed to the first position reaches the first number. The predetermined section is configured with a path length in which a second number of game balls larger than the second number can flow at least simultaneously when the variable means is changed to the second position.

  Accordingly, it is possible to cause a game to be played in the expectation that the predetermined section is changed to the first position in a state in which the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number. There is.

  The gaming machine F6 includes launching means capable of launching game balls at time intervals greater than or equal to a predetermined interval, and the predetermined section is in a state in which game balls are continuously fired at the predetermined interval in the second direction. The second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section after the one game ball reaches the predetermined section until the game ball passes the predetermined section. A gaming machine F7 that allows a game ball to pass therethrough.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F6, the following effects are produced. That is, game balls are fired by the launching means at time intervals that are equal to or greater than a predetermined interval. In the predetermined section, the game is performed so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section after the game ball reaches the predetermined section until the game ball passes through the predetermined section. The sphere is configured to pass.

  Thereby, for the player who has determined that the identification information indicating the specific determination result is the dynamic display based on the suggested content of the specific effect, the game ball is fired in the second direction at a predetermined interval which is the shortest interval. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine F7, the specific period is configured with a period of time that allows at least the second number of game balls to be launched when the game balls are continuously fired in the second direction at the predetermined interval. A gaming machine F8, which is characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F7, at least a second number of gaming balls can be fired for a specific period when the gaming balls are continuously fired in the second direction at predetermined intervals. Since it is composed of a long period, there is a possibility that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section by firing the game balls in the second direction during the specific period. There is an effect that it is possible to more seriously determine whether or not to release the game ball in the second direction.

  In the gaming machine F7 or F8, as an advantageous state set by the advantageous state setting means, a first advantageous state, and after the transition to the advantageous state rather than the first advantageous state, the variable means is moved to the second position. A gaming machine F9 characterized by comprising state determining means for determining one state from a plurality of states including at least a second advantageous state having a long period until it is varied.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F7 or F8, as the advantageous state set by the advantageous state setting means, the first advantageous state and after shifting to the advantageous state over the first advantageous state One state is determined by the state determination unit from among a plurality of states including at least the second advantageous state having a long period until the variable unit is changed to the second position.

  As a result, in the second advantageous state, the number of game balls that can be launched before the variable means is changed to the second position increases, so that more game balls are more easily guided to the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation that the second advantageous state is determined.

  In the gaming machine F9, the first advantageous state continues as the period from the transition to the advantageous state until the variable means is changed to the second position at the predetermined interval in the second direction. A gaming machine F10 is characterized in that when a game ball is fired, a period of time is set in which it is impossible to fire more than the first number of game balls.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F9, in the first advantageous state, in the 23rd direction, the period between the transition to the advantageous state and the variable means being changed to the second position. When a game ball is continuously fired in a predetermined sense, a period of time that cannot exceed the first number is set, so the first advantageous state is determined. In this case, there is an effect that a game ball can be fired in the second direction during a specific period for a player who wants to obtain more predetermined benefits.

<Characteristic G group> (Allows the player to select a jackpot that can be over-winned or a jackpot that cannot be over-winned)
A first area through which a game ball can pass, a second area different from the first area, a first detection means capable of detecting the passage of the game ball to the first area, and a game to the second area Second detection means capable of detecting passage of a sphere, determination means for executing determination based on establishment of a determination condition, and after the determination result by the determination means has reached a specific determination result, the first detection means, Alternatively, in the gaming machine provided with the bonus game executing means for executing the bonus game advantageous to the player based on the passage of the game ball detected by the second detecting means, the game ball can enter A predetermined privilege is granted based on a first specific area, a second specific area different from the first specific area, and a game ball having entered the first specific area or the second specific area. Benefit granting means, specific flow path through which game balls can flow, and the specific flow A game ball flowing down at least in a predetermined section of the first position where the game ball is more easily guided to the first specific area than passing through the predetermined section, and the predetermined section than being guided to the first specific area First variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is easy to pass through, a third position where a game ball can enter the second specific area, and a game ball that enters more than the third position. As the type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game executing means, the second variable means that can be changed to a difficult fourth position, and after the specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, When the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detection means, the first variable means determines a first privilege game that is variable a predetermined number of times from the second position to the first position, and the second When the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means The game machine and the second varying means is characterized by comprising: a type determination means for determining a second award game that is a predetermined number of times the variable to the third position from the fourth position G1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball at a start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits that differ in the number of times (number of rounds) of opening of a large opening to which a prize ball is awarded when a game ball wins. There is one that aims to improve interest by making the value different (for example, Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

  In addition, in such a conventional gaming machine, the winning state is not started only by winning the lottery result, and the winning state is obtained when winning in one of a plurality of operation winning holes provided in the game board. Some are started. This conventional gaming machine is configured such that different types of winning games are started according to the types of operating winning holes that the player has won.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the hit type is determined, the amount of game value obtained during hit is almost constant according to the hit type, so the game value according to the hit type In some cases, the game in the hit state becomes monotonous. That is, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, a first specific area in which a game ball can enter and a second specific area different from the first specific area are provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first specific area or the second specific area, a predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege giving means. A game ball that is flowing down at least a predetermined section in a specific flow path in which a game ball can flow is guided to the first specific area and a first position where it is easier to be guided to the first specific area than to pass through the predetermined section. The first variable means is configured to be variable at a second position where it is easier to pass through the predetermined section. The second variable means is configured to be variable between a third position where the game ball can enter the second specific area and a fourth position where the game ball is difficult to enter than the third position. ing. As a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, the first variable means is used when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detection means after the specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means. The first privilege game that is varied a predetermined number of times from the second position to the first position is determined by the type determining means. On the other hand, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the second detection means, the second privilege game in which the second variable means is changed a predetermined number of times from the fourth position to the third position is determined by the type determination means. The

  As a result, the type of privilege game can be varied depending on whether the game ball passes through the first area or the game ball passes through the second area, so that attention can be paid to the area through which the game ball passes. There is an effect that can be done.

  The gaming machine G1 includes a passing means through which a game ball can pass, and a sorting means that can distribute the game ball that has passed through the passing means to either the first area or the second area. A gaming machine G2 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine G1, the gaming balls that have passed through the passing means through which the gaming balls can pass are distributed to either the first area or the second area by the sorting means. Therefore, the type of privilege game varies depending on the area allocated by the distribution means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed while paying attention to the area to be distributed.

  In the gaming machine G2, the state of the allocating unit is changed to the first area from the time when a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determining unit until the execution of the privilege game is started. The game machine G3 is provided with a distribution state switching means for switching at a predetermined cycle between a first distribution state in which game balls are distributed and a second distribution state in which game balls are distributed to the second area.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G2, the state of the sorting means is not less than the specific judgment result obtained by the judgment by the judgment means until the bonus game is started. The state switching means switches between the first distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the first area and the second distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to the second area at a predetermined cycle. There is an effect that it is possible to determine the player's favorite privilege game type by checking the distribution state and passing the passing means.

  The gaming machine G3 includes display means capable of displaying an effect mode, and effect execution means for executing a distribution state suggestion effect suggesting the distribution state of the distribution means on the display means. Gaming machine G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G3, the distribution state suggesting effect that suggests the distribution state of the distribution means is executed by the effect execution means on the display means, so the display means is confirmed. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to easily recognize the timing at which the player's favorite privilege game is determined.

  In the gaming machine G4, the effect execution means performs a first distribution state suggestion effect that suggests the first distribution state based on switching to the first distribution state by the distribution state switching means. Based on switching to the second distribution state by the first suggestion effect execution means to be executed and the distribution state switching means, the second distribution state suggestion effect that suggests the second distribution state is executed. Second suggestion effect execution means, and the gaming machine includes advantage determination means capable of determining an advantage degree when a game ball passes through the first area, and the first suggestion effect execution means includes: The gaming machine G5, wherein in the first distribution state suggestion effect, the degree of advantage determined by the advantage determination means can be suggested.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G4, the following effects are produced. That is, in the effect execution means, the first distribution state suggestion effect suggesting the first distribution state by the first suggestion effect execution means based on the change to the first distribution state by the distribution state switching means. On the other hand, the second distribution state suggestion effect that suggests the second distribution state is executed based on the switching to the second distribution state. The advantage level when the game ball passes through the first area is determined by the advantage determining means. In the first distribution state suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect execution means suggests the degree of advantage determined by the advantage determination means.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the timing which passes a 1st area | region can be measured according to the advantageous degree suggested in the 1st suggestion production.

  In the gaming machine G5, the advantage discriminating unit discriminates the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section, and the first suggestion effect executing unit determines the number of game balls discriminated by the advantage discriminating unit. A gaming machine G6, wherein an effect suggesting the number can be suggested in the first distribution state suggesting effect.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G5, the following effects are produced. That is, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is determined by the advantage determining means. An effect suggesting the number of game balls determined by the advantage determining means is suggested by the first suggestion effect executing means in the first distribution state suggesting effect.

  Thus, by confirming the first suggestion effect, there is an effect that the number of game balls guided to the first specific area when passing through the first area can be easily understood.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G6, the bonus game executing means is a game that has entered the first specific area after the first variable means is first changed to the first position in the first bonus game. The first variable means is changed to the second position based on the fact that the number of balls has reached the first number or more, and the first variable means is changed to the second position in the predetermined section. The gaming machine G7 is characterized in that a second number of game balls larger than the first number in the state is configured with a path length that can flow down simultaneously.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G6, the following effects are produced. That is, the first variable means is based on the fact that the number of game balls entering the first specific area after the first variable means is first changed to the first position in the first privilege game is greater than or equal to the first number. It is changed to the second position by the privilege game execution means. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls larger than the first number to flow down simultaneously when the first variable means is changed to the second position.

  As a result, it is possible to fire the game ball by devising to pass the first region after the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number. There is an effect that interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G7, the bonus game executing means is configured such that in the second bonus game, the gaming ball that has entered the second specific area after the second variable means is first changed to the third position is the first bonus game. A gaming machine characterized in that the second variable means is changed to the fourth position based on the fact that the number is greater than one and the third number is less than the second number. G8.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine G7, the gaming ball that has entered the second specific area after the second variable means is first changed to the third position in the second privilege game is the first Since the second variable means is changed to the fourth position by the privilege game executing means based on the fact that the number is greater than the number and less than the third number, the second variable means is changed to the fourth position by the privilege game executing means. Then, a third number of game balls larger than the first number can be stably entered into the second specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with peace of mind during the execution of the second privilege game.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E8, F1 to F10, and G1 to G8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E8, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, the gaming machine is a slot machine . Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

One of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E8, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits with different numbers of rounds, and there are some that aim to improve the fun of hitting by changing the game value that can be acquired (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).
However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the game value that can be acquired is almost constant for each hit type, so it becomes like work to obtain a game value according to the hit type, There was a case of becoming monotonous. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game.
This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in games.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 provides a privilege that grants a predetermined privilege based on a specific area in which a game ball can enter and a game ball entering the specific area. Means, a specific flow path through which the game ball can flow, and a first position at which the game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in the specific flow path is more easily guided to the specific area than passing through the predetermined section; The variable means that can be changed to the second position that makes it easier to pass through the predetermined section than being guided to the specific area, the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation content for the operation means is the first When the operation content is reached, the game ball is fired at the first firing speed at which the game ball easily reaches the specific flow path, and the second operation content is different from the first operation content. A second launch different from the first launch rate When the game ball is launched at the second launch speed by the launch means capable of launching the game ball at a degree, the launch means is more effective than the case where the game ball is launched at the first launch speed. Determining means for determining whether or not the specific condition is satisfied; and based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the determining means, the variable means is moved from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time. Variable control means for controlling to be variable.
The gaming machine of technical idea 2 is the gaming machine of technical idea 1, wherein the variable control means is configured such that the variable means is based on the fact that the first number of gaming balls have entered the specific area. The predetermined section is controlled to change from the first position to the second position, and the predetermined section has a second number greater than the first number in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position. Are configured with a path length that allows the game balls to flow down simultaneously.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein the launching means is capable of firing a game ball at a time interval greater than or equal to a predetermined interval, and the predetermined interval is the predetermined interval. In the state where the game ball is being fired continuously at the first firing speed, the time from when one game ball reaches the predetermined section until the game ball passes the predetermined section In addition, the game balls are passed through so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section.
The gaming machine of technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein when the variable means is changed to the first position, all of the flowing down the predetermined section The game ball is configured to be guided to the specific area.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 4, further comprising a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and the discrimination means play a game to the ball entry means. When the ball enters the ball, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, a special area in which a game ball can enter, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the specific area, A specific flow path through which the ball can flow, a first position at which a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section of the specific flow path is more easily guided to the specific area than passing through the predetermined section, and the specific area The variable means that can be changed to the second position that makes it easier to pass through the predetermined section than being guided to the player, the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation content for the operation means become the first operation content. When the game ball is fired at a first firing speed at which the game ball can easily reach the specific flow path, and the second operation content is different from the first operation content, Playing a game ball at a second firing speed different from the first firing speed A launching means capable of firing, and a specific condition that is easier to be satisfied when the game ball is fired at the second firing speed by the firing means than when fired at the first firing speed And determining means for determining whether or not the specific condition is satisfied by the determining means so that the variable means varies from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time. Variable control means.
Thereby, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the variable control means is based on the fact that the first number of gaming balls have entered the specific area. The variable means is controlled to change from the first position to the second position, and the predetermined section is the first section in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position. A second number of game balls larger than the number is configured with a path length that can flow down simultaneously.
As a result, the operation means can be operated by devising the specific condition to be satisfied after the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is an effect that can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the launching unit can launch a game ball at a time interval greater than or equal to a predetermined interval, In the predetermined section, in a state where game balls are being fired at the first firing speed continuously at the predetermined intervals, after one game ball reaches the predetermined section, the game balls are The game balls are passed so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section before passing through the section.
Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to continuously fire the game balls at predetermined intervals to a player who wants to make the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section more than the first number.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect exerted by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the variable means is configured to perform the predetermined operation when being changed to the first position. All the game balls flowing down the section are configured to be guided to the specific area.
Thus, by confirming the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section, it is possible to know the number of game balls guided to the specific area when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily understand the degree of advantage when the specific condition is satisfied.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 4, the gaming machine includes a ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter, and the discrimination means includes: It is determined that the specific condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the entrance means.
Thereby, there is an effect that the specific condition can be easily established at the player's favorite timing by aiming at the ball entry means and firing the game ball.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
51 Operation handle (operating means)
65a Right specific winning entrance (specific area)
65f1 door (predetermined section, first variable means)
111 payout control device (privilege grant means)
112 Firing control device (firing means)
660 Acting prize opening (means for entering the ball)
670a rotating member (second variable means)
S913 Second variable control means S1102 Discriminating means S1206 First variable control means

Claims (2)

A specific area where game balls can enter,
A privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the specific area;
A specific flow path through which game balls can flow down,
A first position at which a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in the specific flow path is more easily guided to the specific area than passing through the predetermined section, and the predetermined section than being guided to the specific area A first variable means that is variable to a second position that facilitates passage;
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Based on the fact that the operation content for the operation means is the first operation content, the game ball is fired at a first firing speed at which the game ball easily reaches the specific flow path, and the first operation is performed. Launching means capable of launching a game ball at a second launch speed different from the first launch speed based on the second operation content different from the content;
A ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball launched at the second launch speed by the launch means is easier to enter than the game ball launched at the first launch speed;
A discriminating means for discriminating whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entering means while at least a predetermined specific condition is established;
It said first position from said second position before Symbol first varying means on the basis that the previous entry ball means game ball is determined to have entered the special while the specific conditions are satisfied by the determination means perform a first variable control that will be the first period variable to the while the different second specific condition is satisfied and the specific conditions, the a game ball that is fired at the first firing rate second A game ball launched at a third launch speed that is different from the first launch speed and the second launch speed can enter the game ball that is launched at a launch speed of A second variable in which the first variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a second period based on a game ball entering a specific ball entry means provided at a position. First variable control means capable of executing control;
A third position at which the game ball fired at the second launch speed can enter the entrance means, and a game position at which the game ball becomes difficult to enter the entrance means from the third position. Second variable means variable to four positions;
Second variable control means for changing the second variable means in a predetermined variable pattern, and
The specific condition, the gaming machine characterized that you have been configured in conditions that may established when the continued firing the game ball at least the third rate of fire.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the launching unit is configured to be able to launch a game ball at a launching speed corresponding to an operation amount of a player with respect to the operation unit.

Images